IBM Personal Computer pSeries690 User Manual
IBM  
ERserver  
pSeries 690  
User’s Guide  
SA38-0588-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Safety Notices .  
Electrical Safety.  
Laser Safety Information .  
Laser Compliance .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. ix  
. ix  
. x  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. x  
Data Integrity and Verification  
About This Book  
. xi  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. xiii  
. xiii  
. xiii  
. xiii  
. xiii  
. xiv  
Highlighting .  
ISO 9000  
.
.
.
.
.
Online Publications  
Related Publications .  
Trademarks .  
.
.
.
Chapter 1. Introducing the Eserver pSeries 690 .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 1  
. 2  
. 3  
. 3  
. 4  
. 4  
. 5  
. 5  
. 6  
. 6  
. 8  
. 8  
System Configurations.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Partitioned System Overview  
Partition Profiles .  
System Profiles .  
Types of Partitions .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Processor on Demand.  
Processor on Demand Features  
Processor on Demand Activation Features .  
Capacity Planning . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Software Licenses and Processor on Demand .  
Activating Process for Processor on Demand .  
Chapter 2. Using the Eserver pSeries 690 .  
Hardware Management Console (HMC) Overview and Setup .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9  
. 9  
. 9  
System Power-on Methods .  
Powering the Server On and Off  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 9  
Powering On the Processor Subsystem using the HMC  
Powering Off the Processor Subsystem Using the HMC .  
Graphics Console Support .  
Reading the Operator Panel Display.  
Checkpoints .  
Disturbance or System Attention LED  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10  
. 10  
. 10  
. 11  
. 11  
. 11  
. 13  
. 13  
. 13  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Understanding the Power-On Self-Test (POST) .  
.
.
.
.
POST Indicators  
POST Keys .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor.  
Service Processor Menus . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 15  
. 15  
. 16  
. 16  
. 16  
. 16  
.
.
.
.
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Locally.  
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Remotely .  
Saving and Restoring Service Processor Settings  
Menu Inactivity .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General User Menu .  
Privileged User Menus .  
Main Menu . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 17  
. 19  
. 19  
. 21  
. 22  
. 27  
. 32  
. 42  
. 44  
. 45  
. 46  
. 47  
. 47  
. 49  
. 50  
. 50  
. 50  
. 50  
. 52  
. 52  
. 52  
. 52  
. 52  
. 55  
. 55  
. 56  
. 56  
. 57  
. 58  
. 59  
. 59  
. 60  
. 61  
. 61  
. 63  
. 63  
. 64  
. 64  
. 65  
.
.
Service Processor Setup Menu  
Passwords .  
System Power Control Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Information Menu .  
Language Selection Menu .  
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
Modem Configuration Menu  
Serial Port Selection Menu .  
.
.
.
.
.
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
Telephone Number Setup Menu .  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
Customer Account Setup Menu  
Call-out Test.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Parameters in Service Mode (Full System Partition) .  
System Power-On Methods  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Boot (IPL) Speed .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Failure During Boot Process  
Failure During Normal System Operation .  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls .  
Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or Memory .  
Run-Time CPU Deconfiguration (CPU Gard) .  
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Firmware Surveillance.  
Operating System Surveillance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Call-Out (Call-Home) .  
Console Mirroring .  
System Configuration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Service Processor Error Logs .  
LCD Progress Indicator Log  
Resetting the Service Processor .  
.
Service Processor Operational Phases .  
Pre-Standby Phase  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Standby Phase.  
Bring-Up Phase  
.
.
Run-Time Phase .  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 67  
. 68  
. 69  
. 69  
. 69  
. 71  
. 75  
. 76  
. 76  
. 79  
Select Language .  
Password Utilities .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Set Privileged-Access Password .  
View Error Log . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load) .  
Change SCSI Settings  
Select Console .  
Select Boot Options .  
Select Boot Devices .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
iv Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Current Settings.  
Restore Default Settings  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 81  
. 81  
. 82  
. 82  
Multiboot Startup .  
.
.
Exiting System Management Services .  
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics  
Online and Standalone Diagnostics Operating Considerations .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 83  
. 83  
. 84  
. 84  
. 84  
. 84  
. 85  
. 85  
. 85  
. 86  
. 86  
. 87  
. 87  
. 88  
. 88  
. 88  
. 89  
. 89  
Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Undefined Terminal Types .  
Resetting the Terminal  
Running Online Diagnostics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Online Diagnostics Modes of Operation  
Service Mode .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Running Online Diagnostics in Service Mode .  
Concurrent Mode . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode  
Maintenance Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode.  
Standalone Diagnostic Operation .  
Performing Slow Boot .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Partitioned System Considerations for Standalone Diagnostics .  
Considerations for Running Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM  
Loading the Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM. .  
.
.
.
.
Running Standalone Diagnostics from a Network Installation Management (NIM)  
Server .  
NIM Server Configuration  
Client Configuration and Booting Standalone Diagnostics from the NIM Server  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 89  
. 90  
91  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 93  
. 94  
. 95  
. 95  
. 95  
Tasks .  
Add Resource to Resource List  
AIX Shell Prompt .  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Backup and Restore Media.  
Certify Media  
.
.
. 96  
. 97  
.
.
.
.
.
Change Hardware Vital Product Data .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 100  
. 100  
. 100  
. 101  
. 102  
. 104  
. 105  
. 106  
. 106  
. 107  
. 107  
. 107  
. 108  
. 108  
. 108  
Configure Dials and LPF Keys .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configure ISA Adapter .  
Configure Reboot Policy  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy.  
Configure Scan Dump Policy.  
Configure Surveillance Policy  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
Delete Resource from Resource List .  
.
.
.
.
Disk Maintenance  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Disk to Disk Copy  
Display/Alter Sector .  
Display Configuration and Resource List .  
Display Firmware Device Node Information .  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Hardware Error Report .  
Display Hardware Vital Product Data .  
Display Machine Check Error Log .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 108  
. 109  
. 109  
. 109  
. 109  
. 110  
. 112  
. 112  
. 112  
. 113  
. 113  
. 114  
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
. 115  
116  
. 116  
. 117  
. 117  
. 118  
. 118  
. 119  
. 119  
. 120  
. 120  
. 121  
. 121  
. 122  
. 122  
. 122  
. 122  
. 123  
. 125  
. 126  
. 126  
. 126  
. 127  
. 127  
. 128  
. 128  
. 128  
. 129  
. 129  
. 129  
. 130  
. 130  
. 131  
. 131  
.
.
.
Display Microcode Level .  
Display or Change Bootlist  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options .  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Resource Attributes .  
Display Service Hints .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Software Product Data .  
Display System Environmental Sensors  
Examples .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Display Test Patterns  
Display USB Devices  
Download Microcode  
Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter .  
Download Microcode to a PCI-X Dual Channel Adapter .  
Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
Download Microcode to a Fiber Channel Adapter .  
Download Microcode to DVD-RAM Attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter .  
Download Microcode to Disk Attached to PCI SCSI Adapter  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Download Microcode to Other Devices  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Fault Indicators  
Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids  
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
Format Media .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID) .  
Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Optical Media .  
Diskette Format .  
Gather System Information  
Generic Microcode Download  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Hot Plug Task.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
PCI Hot Plug Manager .  
SCSI Hot Swap Manager .  
RAID Hot Plug Devices  
Identify Indicators  
.
.
.
.
.
Identify and System Attention Indicators .  
Local Area Network Analyzer.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Log Repair Action  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Periodic Diagnostics  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify.  
Process Supplemental Media  
.
.
.
.
Run Diagnostics .  
Run Error Log Analysis  
Run Exercisers  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Exerciser Commands (CMD) .  
Abbreviations .  
Memory Exerciser  
Tape Exerciser  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vi Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Diskette Exerciser  
CD-ROM Exerciser .  
Floating Point Exerciser  
SCSI Bus Analyzer .  
SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 131  
. 131  
. 131  
. 133  
. 134  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 135  
. 136  
. 137  
. 139  
. 139  
.
.
Spare Sector Availability  
SSA Service Aid .  
System Fault Indicator .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
System Identify Indicator .  
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics .  
Update System or Service Processor Flash .  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid  
Command Examples .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid  
Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation  
Step 1. Considerations Before Running This Procedure .  
Step 2. Loading the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 141  
. 141  
. 141  
. 142  
. 142  
. 143  
. 143  
Step 2.5 Loading the Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM .  
Step 3. Running System Verification  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Step 4. Performing Additional System Verification .  
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination  
Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics .  
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 145  
. 145  
. 151  
.
.
.
Appendix A. Environmental Notices.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 155  
. 155  
. 155  
. 156  
. 156  
Product Recycling and Disposal.  
.
.
.
.
.
.
Environmental Design .  
.
.
.
.
Acoustical Noise Emissions .  
Declared Acoustical Noise Emissions .  
Appendix B. Notices .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 157  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 159  
. 159  
. 160  
. 160  
. 161  
. 161  
Service Processor Setup Checklist .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Testing the Setup  
Testing Call-In  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Testing Call-Out .  
Serial Port Configuration .  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 163  
. 163  
. 163  
. 163  
. 164  
. 165  
. 166  
. 166  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Generic Modem Configuration Files  
Specific Modem Configuration Files  
.
Configuration File Selection .  
.
.
.
Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files  
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files.  
IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings . .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Contents vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Xon/Xoff Modems  
Ring Detection  
Terminal Emulators .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 167  
. 167  
. 167  
. 168  
. 169  
. 170  
. 170  
. 171  
. 171  
. 173  
. 175  
. 177  
. 179  
. 182  
. 185  
.
Recovery Procedures .  
Transfer of a Modem Session  
Recovery Strategy .  
Prevention Strategy .  
Modem Configuration Sample Files  
.
.
.
.
Sample File modem_m0.cfg .  
Sample File modem_m1.cfg .  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Sample File modem_z.cfg.  
Sample File modem_z0.cfg  
Sample File modem_f.cfg .  
Sample File modem_f0.cfg  
Sample File modem_f1.cfg  
.
.
.
.
.
Index  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 189  
viii Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Notices  
A danger notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing  
death or serious personal injury. Danger notices appear on the following pages:  
ix  
v
A caution notice indicates the presence of a hazard that has the potential of causing  
moderate or minor personal injury. Caution notices appear on the following pages:  
v
v
ix  
x
For a translation of the safety notices contained in this book, see the System Unit  
Safety Information, order number SA23-2652.  
Electrical Safety  
Observe the following safety instructions any time you are connecting or disconnecting  
devices attached to the system.  
DANGER  
An electrical outlet that is not correctly wired could place hazardous voltage  
on metal parts of the system or the devices that attach to the system. It is the  
responsibility of the customer to ensure that the outlet is correctly wired and  
grounded to prevent an electrical shock.  
Use one hand, when possible, to connect or disconnect signal cables to  
prevent a possible shock from touching two surfaces with different electrical  
potentials.  
During an electrical storm, do not connect cables for display stations, printers,  
telephones, or station protectors for communications lines.  
D06  
CAUTION:  
This product is equipped with a four-wire (three-phase and ground) power cable  
for the user’s safety. Use this power cable with a properly grounded electrical  
outlet to avoid electrical shock.  
C27  
DANGER  
To prevent electrical shock hazard, disconnect all power cables from the  
electrical outlet before relocating the system.  
D01  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Laser Safety Information  
CAUTION:  
This product may contain a CD-ROM, DVD-ROM, or laser module on a PCI card,  
which are class 1 laser products.  
C30  
Laser Compliance  
All lasers are certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR  
Subchapter J for class 1 laser products. Outside the U.S., they are certified to be in  
compliance with the IEC 825 (first edition 1984) as a class 1 laser product. Consult the  
label on each part for laser certification numbers and approval information.  
CAUTION:  
All IBM laser modules are designed so that there is never any human access to  
laser radiation above a class 1 level during normal operation, user maintenance,  
or prescribed service conditions. Data processing environments can contain  
equipment transmitting on system links with laser modules that operate at  
greater than class 1 power levels. For this reason, never look into the end of an  
optical fiber cable or open receptacle. Only trained service personnel should  
perform the inspection or repair of optical fiber cable assemblies and receptacles.  
C25, C26  
x
Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Data Integrity and Verification  
IBM computer systems contain mechanisms designed to reduce the possibility of  
undetected data corruption or loss. This risk, however, cannot be eliminated. Users who  
experience unplanned outages, system failures, power fluctuations or outages, or  
component failures must verify the accuracy of operations performed and data saved or  
transmitted by the system at or near the time of the outage or failure. In addition, users  
must establish procedures to ensure that there is independent data verification before  
relying on such data in sensitive or critical operations. Users should periodically check  
the IBM support websites for updated information and fixes applicable to the system and  
related software.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
xii Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
About This Book  
This book provides information on how to use the server, use diagnostics, use service  
aids, and verify server operation. This book also provides information to help you solve  
some of the simpler problems that might occur.  
Highlighting  
The following highlighting conventions are used in this book:  
Bold  
Identifies commands, subroutines, keywords, files, structures, directories, and  
other items whose names are predefined by the system. Also identifies  
graphical objects such as buttons, labels, and icons that the user selects.  
Italics  
Identifies parameters whose actual names or values are to be supplied by the  
user.  
Monospace  
Identifies examples of specific data values, examples of text similar to what  
you might see displayed, examples of portions of program code similar to  
what you might write as a programmer, messages from the system, or  
information you should actually type.  
ISO 9000  
ISO 9000 registered quality systems were used in the development and manufacturing  
of this product.  
Online Publications  
IBM Eserver pSeries publications are available online. To access the online books,  
visit our IBM Eserver pSeries Information Center at  
http://publib16.boulder.ibm.com/pseries/en_US/infocenter/base. Click Hardware  
documentation.  
Related Publications  
The following publications provide related information:  
v
v
v
The System Unit Safety Information, order number SA23-2652, contains translations  
of safety information used throughout this book.  
The Site and Hardware Planning Information, order number SA38-0508, contains  
information to help you plan your installation.  
The Eserver pSeries 690 Service Guide, SA38-0589, contains reference  
information, maintenance analysis procedures (MAPs), error codes, removal and  
replacement procedures, and a parts catalog.  
v
The Eserver pSeries 690 Installation Guide, SA23-1285, contains information on  
how to set up and cable the server and verify server operation.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
The IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations  
Guide, SA38-0590, provides information to system administrators on how to install  
and use a Hardware Management Console (HMC) to manage a system.  
The IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries Maintenance Guide,  
SA38-0603, provides information on how to service a Hardware Management  
Console (HMC).  
The RS/6000 and Eserver Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems,  
SA38-0509, contains diagnostic information, service request numbers (SRNs), and  
failing function codes (FFCs).  
The RS/6000 and Eserver Adapters, Devices and Cable Information for Multiple  
Bus Systems, SA38-0516, contains information about adapters, devices, and cables  
for your server. This manual is intended to supplement the service information found  
in the Diagnostic Information for Multiple Bus Systems.  
v
The PCI Adapter Placement Reference, SA23-2504, contains information regarding  
slot restrictions for adapters that can be used in this system.  
Trademarks  
The following terms are trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation in  
the United States, other countries, or both:  
v
v
v
v
v
AIX  
RS/6000  
Eserver  
IBM  
pSeries  
Other company, product, and service names may be trademarks or service marks of  
others.  
xiv Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 1. Introducing the Eserver pSeries 690  
The Eserver pSeries 690 system is a shared multiprocessor server.  
The system can be configured (or partitioned) to be used as multiple separate systems.  
This configuration is known as a logically partitioned system.  
The following illustration shows an Eserver pSeries 690 containing two Integrated  
Battery Feature drawers.  
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
8
9
1
2
Hardware Management Console for  
pSeries  
7
8
7040 Model 61D I/O  
Subsystem  
7040 Model 61R Bulk Power Subsystem  
7040 Model 61D I/O  
Subsystem (Optional)  
Redundant 7040 Model 61R Bulk Power  
Subsystem is placed in the rear.  
3
7040 Model 681 Processor Subsystem  
9
7040 Model 61D I/O  
Subsystem (Optional)  
4
7040 Model 681 Media Drawer  
5*,6*  
Primary 7040 Model 61R Integrated  
Battery Feature (IBF) (Optional) for the  
Primary Power Subsystem.  
Redundant 7040 Model 61R Integrated  
Battery Feature (IBF) (Optional) is placed  
in the rear.  
*7040 Model 61D I/O Subsystem (Optional, if features 5 and 6 are not installed).  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A pSeries 690 system can have up to two racks, which support up to eight I/O drawer  
subsystems.  
The Hardware Management Console for pSeries (HMC) is used to manage the  
resources in the system. The system can be configured as a full system partition, which  
means that all resources of the system are used as a single system.  
The system can also be configured into multiple (or logical) partitioned systems. With a  
logically partitioned system, system resources can be divided into a number of systems  
each running in its own partition.  
Numerous configurations of pSeries 690 systems can be managed from one Hardware  
Management Console. A second Hardware Management Console can be used for  
redundancy.  
System Configurations  
The system configuration may vary. Possible configurations include:  
v
v
v
Multiple pSeries 690s attached to one Hardware Management Console (HMC)  
Two HMCs attached to one pSeries 690  
Two HMCs jointly managing up to eight pSeries 690s  
The following components make up the base configuration of the pSeries 690:  
v
Rack and Bulk Power Subsystem (BPA) The BPA is the main power control unit for  
the pSeries 690. This redundant bulk power assembly distributes power at 350 V to  
each drawer where conversion is made to the required chip level.  
v
Processor Subsystem The processor subsystem is a 17 EIA-unit-high drawer. The  
processor subsystem contains the backplane, up to four processor modules, up to 16  
L3 cache modules, up to four I/O books, up to eight memory books, and cooling  
blowers. The processor subsystem drawer also contains the power subsystem  
components used in the conversion of 350 V bulk power to the supply voltages  
required by the various internal components.  
Several memory book sizes are available. The minimum memory requirement to  
operate this system is 8 GB, and the maximum amount of memory is 256 GB.  
v
v
Media Drawer The media drawer is a 1 EIA-unit high drawer containing an operator  
panel, 1.44 MB floppy diskette drive, one SCSI optical drive (either a CD-ROM or a  
DVD-RAM), signal cables, power cables, a 1 EIA-unit-high 24-inch rack-mountable  
sheet metal enclosure, and miscellaneous mechanical hardware. Three additional  
SCSI bays are available to add optional CD-ROMs, DVD-RAMs, or 4-mm tape  
drives:  
–
–
–
Variable Speed SCSI-2 CD-ROM Drive  
SCSI DVD-RAM Drive  
4-mm Internal Tape Drive  
Integrated Battery Feature (IBF) (optional) The IBF is a 2 EIA-unit-high drawer that  
can be added to your system. The IBF provides backup electric power in case of a  
power outage. You can install up to two IBFs in the base rack configuration. One  
additional IBF can be installed in an expansion rack.  
2
Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
I/O Drawers The I/O drawer is a 4 EIA-unit-high drawer containing up to two I/O  
boards, up to 16 disk drives, four DASD backplanes, a midplane card, four cooling  
fans and two power supplies (which are independent of the bulk power assembly).  
The base rack configuration can have up to four I/O drawers with each drawer  
having 20 PCI card slots, and more than 500 GB of storage. An expansion rack can  
be connected to the base system and contain additional I/O drawers and IBFs.  
Note: If your base rack configuration contains an IBF, the space in the rack for the  
fourth I/O drawer in that rack is not available.However, an expansion rack  
allows you to add additional I/O drawers and an additional IBF.  
Hardware Management Console (HMC) - The HMC consists of a display,  
independent processor, keyboard, and mouse. The HMC is mandatory for all  
systems. For more information on the use of logical partitioned systems, see the  
“Partitioned System Overview”.  
Partitioned System Overview  
Partitioning enables users to configure a single computer into several independent  
systems. Each of these systems, called logical partitions, is capable of running  
applications in its own independent environment. This independent environment  
contains its own operating system, its own set of system processors, its own set of  
system memory, and its own I/O adapters.  
An affinity partition is a special type of logical partition in which processors and system  
memory are allocated in a predefined way that may increase performance when running  
some types of applications (memory is assigned to a processor that is in close physical  
proximity to it).  
The HMC allows you to perform many hardware management tasks for your managed  
system, including configuring logical partitions. You can choose to operate your  
managed system as a single server (called full system partitions), or you can choose to  
run multiple partitions.  
Partition Profiles  
A profile defines a configuration setup for a managed system or partition. The HMC  
allows you to create multiple profiles for each managed system or partition. You can  
then use the profiles you created to start a managed system or partition in a particular  
configuration.  
A partition does not actually own any resources until it is activated; resource  
specifications are stored within partition profiles. The same partition can operate using  
different resources at different times, depending on the profile you activate.  
When you activate a partition, you enable the system to create a partition using the set  
of resources in a profile created for that partition. For example, a logical partition profile  
might indicate to the managed system that its partition requires three processors, 2  
gigabytes of memory, and I/O slots 6, 11, and 12 when activated.  
Chapter 1. Introducing the Eserver pSeries 690  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
 
You can have more than one profile for a partition. However, you can only activate a  
partition with one profile at a time. Additionally, affinity partitions and logical partitions  
cannot be active at the same time.  
When you create a partition profile, the HMC shows you all the resources available on  
your system. The HMC does not, however, verify if another partition profile is currently  
using a portion of these resources. For example, the HMC might show 16 processors  
on your system, but does not notify you that other partitions are using nine of them. You  
can create two partition profiles, each using a majority of system resources. If you  
attempt to activate both of these partitions at the same time, the second partition in the  
activation list fails.  
System Profiles  
Using the HMC, you can create and activate often-used collections of predefined  
partition profiles. A collection of predefined partition profiles is called a system profile.  
The system profile is an ordered list of partitions and the profile that is to be activated  
for each partition. The first profile in the list is activated first, followed by the second  
profile in the list, followed by the third, and so on.  
The system profile helps you change the managed systems from one complete set of  
partitions configurations to another. For example, a company might want to switch from  
using 12 partitions to using only four, every day. To do this, the system administrator  
deactivates the 12 partitions and activates a different system profile, one specifying four  
partitions.  
When you create a group of affinity partitions, the HMC automatically creates a system  
profile that includes all of the affinity partitions that you created.  
Types of Partitions  
The HMC allows you to use two types of partitions: logical partitions and the full system  
partition.  
Logical Partitions  
Logical partitions are user-defined system resource divisions. Users determine the  
number of processors, memory, and I/O that a logical partition can have when active.  
Affinity Partitions: An affinity partition is a special type of logical partition in which  
processors and system memory are allocated in a predefined way that may increase  
performance when running some types of applications (memory is assigned to a  
processor that is in close physical proximity to it).  
Affinity partitions can be created with either four or eight processors. The user  
determines the allocation of I/O resources in a server with affinity partitions; only the  
allocation of processors and memory is predefined.  
Reassigning Partition Resources Dynamically: You can logically attach and detach  
a managed system’s resources to and from a logical partition’s operating system  
4
Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
without rebooting. In addition, failing resources can be dynamically released from the  
owning partition, serviced and reattached, or replaced with an acceptable replacement  
without disturbing the partition’s activities.  
Full System Partition  
A special partition called the full system partition assigns all of your managed system’s  
resources to one large partition. The full system partition is similar to the traditional,  
non-partition method of operating a system. Because all resources are assigned to this  
partition, no other partitions can be started when the full system partition is running.  
Likewise, the full system partition cannot be started while other partitions are running.  
The HMC allows you to easily switch from the full system partition to logical partitions.  
The actual setup of the operating system in a partition may require some careful  
planning to ensure that no conflicts exist between the two environments.  
For more detail on partitions, see the IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries  
Installation and Operations Guide, order number SA38-0590.  
Processor on Demand  
The Processor On Demand (POD) feature of some IBM servers allows the server to be  
manufactured with extra processor capacity built in, ready to be activated when you  
need it. If your system is ordered with processor on demand features, you can activate  
the features and pay for the increased processing power as your needs grow.  
The processor on demand feature enables you to start small, and then increase your  
processing capacity without disrupting any of your current operations.  
For information about how to activate processor on demand features on your server,  
refer to “Activating Process for Processor on Demand” on page 8, or refer to the IBM  
Hardware Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide, order  
number SA38-0590 that was delivered with your hardware management console.  
The processor on demand feature offers the capability to non-disruptively activate two  
or more processors on a server that was ordered and installed with inactive processor  
on demand features. The processor on demand feature adds capacity in increments of  
two processors, up to the maximum number of standby processors. The processor on  
demand feature adds significant value if you want to upgrade without disruption, handle  
business peaks, or add new workloads. The processor on demand feature adds  
permanent capacity growth with no requirement to reboot the server.  
Processor on Demand Features  
If your system was ordered with processor on demand features, your managed system  
has a set of processors that are ″active″ and a set of standby processors that are ″not  
active.″ In the event that an active processor fails, the inactive processors are then  
available to be used by the system until the failing processor is replaced.  
Chapter 1. Introducing the Eserver pSeries 690  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Processor on Demand Activation Features  
Standby processors (two or more) can be permanently activated by ordering a quantity  
of permanent processor on demand activation features. This order is filled when your  
service provider receives your request, generates an activation code, and delivers it to  
you. Activation codes can be delivered to you through postal mail and they are posted  
on the Web.  
Capacity Planning  
If you are doing capacity planning for models offering processor on demand, plan  
ahead for any potentially disruptive actions that might inhibit your using fully the  
capacity of the activated processors. Some actions you may want to take prior to  
activating any processor on demand features are as follows:  
v
Perform any I/O updates, such as adding adapters necessary to increase system  
capacity  
v
v
Perform memory upgrades  
Prepare LPAR partitions  
By planning ahead, you can accommodate the growth of existing workloads, as well as  
handle new workloads without requiring a server outage. Other components of a server  
such as memory and I/O affect performance and overall throughput of workloads. By  
planning ahead and taking into account the complete server configuration, you can help  
ensure that you get the full benefit of processor on demand activations.  
Note: If you have questions about capacity-planning topics not covered here, contact  
your sales representative for assistance.  
Processor on Demand Ordering  
Permanent processor-on-demand capacity can be activated in either of the following  
scenarios. The description of each of the following scenarios highlights if and when it is  
necessary to send vital product data (VPD) to IBM.  
v
New system order (new footprint): An order can contain a number of processor on  
demand activation features. The manufacturing facility fills orders directly at the plant  
of manufacture, before the server is delivered to the customer.  
v
Ordering activation features for an installed server: After you have determined  
that you want to permanently activate some or all of your standby processors,  
contact your business partner or sales representative to place an order.  
When the order record and the VPD are both available to the manufacturing facility, a  
processor on demand activation code unique to your server is generated. The  
activation code is mailed to you and posted at a public Web site for quick access:  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/cuod/index.html  
As part of the order process, VPD collected from the installed server is combined  
with information from the actual order records for processor on demand activation  
features. This combined information is used to generate a processor on demand  
activation code specifically for your server, enabling the activation of the desired  
number of standby processors. Allow some time for the order processing and posting  
6
Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
of the processor on demand activation code to take place. Then use the code to  
activate the processor on demand features directly on your server.  
Processor on demand activation features will not be fulfilled until you submit the VPD  
through the Electronic Service Agent or manually to the following Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/cuod/index.html  
When you enter a processor on demand activation code, standby processors will  
immediately become activated for use. After their status changes from Standby to  
Active, the processors can be dynamically moved to the partition where they are  
needed.  
Electronic Service Agent and Processor on Demand  
When Electronic Service Agent is used to electronically report VPD on a regular basis,  
you can eliminate potential delays in the order process for processor on demand  
activation features (no manual reporting of VPD is necessary prior to the fulfillment of a  
feature upgrade order). To best utilize Electronic Service Agent and to be prepared to  
activate processor on demand features conveniently, make sure that Electronic Service  
Agent and related communications requirements are up and running. If this is done  
before the processor on demand activation features are ordered, the VPD for the  
system will already be up to date, and the manual process of updating the VPD is not  
needed.  
After Electronic Service Agent is installed, follow the procedures under “Activating  
Process for Processor on Demand” on page 8 to enable the system to collect and  
transfer the required VPD for processor on demand.  
If a processor on demand activation feature is ordered and then canceled, an action by  
the service representative is required to cancel the order. After the activation code is  
posted on the Web or mailed, the order for processor on demand activation features is  
considered fulfilled, and the downstream billing process is started.  
Dynamic Processor Sparing  
In environments with CUoD, Dynamic Processor Sparing allows inactive processors to  
act as “dynamic spares”. An inactive processor is transparently activated if a failing  
processor reaches a predetermined error threshold, thus helping to maintain  
performance and improve system availability. Starting with AIX 5L V5.2, this capability is  
offered on pSeries servers with CUoD to help minimize the impact to server  
performance caused by a failed processor. This will happen dynamically and  
automatically when using DLPAR and the failing processor is detected prior to failure. If  
not detected prior to failure or not using DLPAR, a reboot of the system will bring  
onboard an alternate processor from the inactive spares. The user can then re-establish  
required performance levels without waiting for parts to arrive on-site. Dynamic  
Processor Sparing does not require the purchase of an Activation Code, it only requires  
the system have inactive CUoD processors available.  
Chapter 1. Introducing the Eserver pSeries 690  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
 
Software Licenses and Processor on Demand  
Activating a processor may change the terms and conditions for applications that you  
use on your server. Consult the application documentation to determine if the license  
terms and conditions requirements change based on hardware configuration.  
Activating Process for Processor on Demand  
The processor on demand process begins when you determine a potential need for  
more processing capability in the future and want to have the hardware installed on the  
server now. If processor on demand features are ordered for your server, they are  
included in the server when it is delivered. When additional processors become a  
necessity, use the following steps to activate them:  
1. Determine the number of standby processors you want to activate.  
2. Contact your sales representative or business partner to place an order for  
particular processor on demand activation features.  
3. The sales representative places an order to the system coordinator or feature  
coordinator for the specific number of processor on demand activation features. The  
order specifies the number of additional processors you have requested to add.  
4. To process the order, you must send the system Vital Product Data (VPD) to IBM in  
either of the following ways:  
v
v
Electronic process (Electronic Service Agent)  
Web-based VPD entry:  
For details on how to submit the VPD either through the Electronic Service Agent or  
using the Web system go to the following Web site and locate the document  
Planning Guide for Capacity Upgrade on Demand. The planning guide provides  
detailed procedures.  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/cuod/index.html  
5. After the Activation Code is received (either from the Web or the mailed copy), enter  
the Activation Code using the HMC. Detailed procedures are available in the  
document Planning Guide for Capacity Upgrade on Demand.  
6. Once you have finished the acivation process, you can assign the activated  
processors to a partition. If you are using dynamic partitioning (DLPAR), you need  
not reboot the system to use the processors. If you are not using DLPAR, you must  
reboot the managed system before the newly activated processors can be used.  
Before adding processors to a partition that is running Linux, you must stop Linux  
partitions and then restart them after you have assigned the processors.  
Begin using the new processor capacity. If you encountered any problems using the  
preceding process, see the following Web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/servers/eserver/pseries/cuod/index.html  
8
Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 2. Using the Eserver pSeries 690  
This chapter discusses the Hardware Management Console for pSeries (HMC), system  
power control, and drives supported by the server.  
Hardware Management Console (HMC) Overview and Setup  
The Hardware Management Console (HMC) uses its connection to the processor  
subsystem to perform various functions. The main functions of the HMC include:  
v
v
v
Creating and maintaining a multiple partition environment  
Detecting, reporting, and storing changes in hardware conditions  
Acting as a service focal point for service representatives to determine an  
appropriate service strategy  
Note: The HMC is shipped with the pSeries 690 and is the main interface for  
configuring and managing resources on this system through the HMC virtual  
terminal window. Virtual terminal window refers to the operating system session  
on a particular window. You can have up to 16 virtual terminal windows.  
All the tasks you need to maintain the interface, the underlying operating system, and  
the HMC application code are available by using the HMC’s management applications.  
For more information on the HMC, refer to the IBM Hardware Management Console for  
pSeries Installation and Operations Guide.  
System Power-on Methods  
Using the HMC to power on the managed system is recommended. However, the white  
power button on the media subsystem operator panel can be used to power on the  
managed system. The managed system will reboot in the same mode in which it was  
previously booted. (If the managed system was previously booted in partitioned system  
mode, all partitions will automatically start and run.)  
Powering the Server On and Off  
This section provides procedures for powering the server on and off.  
Progress indicators, also referred to as checkpoints, are visible on the media subsystem  
operator panel display. The power LED on the media subsystem stops blinking and  
stays on, indicating the system power is on.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Powering On the Processor Subsystem using the HMC  
To power on the processor subsystem using the HMC, do the following:  
1. Log in to the HMC with your user ID and password. Refer to the IBM Hardware  
Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide for more  
information on HMC user IDs and passwords.  
2. Click on the Partition Management icon under the HMC hostname to select your  
preferred partition environment. The Contents area now lists the processor  
subsystem as available as a managed system. If you have only one processor  
subsystem, the Contents area lists the processor subsystem as System A  
3. Select the appropriate managed system.  
4. To power on the managed system, select the desired system in the Contents area.  
Next, on the menu, choose Selected.  
5. Select Power On.  
Powering Off the Processor Subsystem Using the HMC  
Attention: Shut down the partitions before powering off the processor subsystem.  
To power off the processor subsystem using the HMC, do the following:  
1. Click on the Partition Management icon under the HMC host name to select your  
preferred partition environment. The Contents area now lists the processor  
subsystem as available as a managed system. If you have only one processor  
subsystem, the Contents area lists the processor subsytem as System A.  
2. Select the appropriate managed system.  
3. To power off the managed system, select the desired system in the Contents area.  
Next, on the menu, choose Selected.  
4. Select Power Off.  
5. A screen displays to verify that you want to power off. Select Yes.  
Note: Only logical power will be removed; 350V dc power will still be present within the  
system.  
Graphics Console Support  
The pSeries 690 supports graphics consoles. Graphics console support requires the  
following adapters:  
v
v
Graphics adapter with a graphics display attached  
Universal Serial Bus (USB) adapter with a keyboard and mouse attached  
Only one graphics console is supported per system partition. If the system is running  
partitions, up to eight partitions can have graphics consoles.  
The graphics console is functional only when AIX is running. For any installation or  
service processor functions, you must use the HMC.  
10 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reading the Operator Panel Display  
The operator panel display is located in the media drawer of the pSeries 690 and is  
used to:  
v
v
v
Track the progress of the system unit self tests and configuration program  
Display codes when the operating system comes to an abnormal end  
Display system messages  
Checkpoints  
During power-on self-test (POST), four-digit checkpoints display, indicating the progress  
of the testing. If an error is detected that requires attention, the server halts with an  
eight-digit error code displayed in the upper row of the operator panel display, starting  
in the leftmost position. This eight-digit error code identifies the error. For a listing of the  
error codes, see the Eserver pSeries 690 Service Guide.  
The four-digit checkpoints are in the form of nnnn, where n is an alphabetic or numeric  
character.  
The following diagram shows the locations of the operator panel display and  
components of the operator panel.  
1
2
3
!
6
R
5
4
1
2
Power on/off button  
Power on/off LED  
4
5
Reset button  
Service processor reset button (Service  
use only)  
3
Operator panel display  
6
Disturbance or system attention LED  
Disturbance or System Attention LED  
The system attention LED on the operator panel is turned on when an entry is made in  
the service processor error log that gets transmitted to the system-level error logs (the  
AIX error log and the service action event log in service focal point). When the attention  
light comes on, examine these error logs to see if user intervention is required.  
If a hardware problem is indicated, call service support. If no intervention is required,  
the system attention LED can be turned off by either of the following methods:  
v
On the HMC’s graphical interface, as follows:  
1. Click on the Service Applications icon.  
Chapter 2. Using the Eserver pSeries 690 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Double-click the Service Focal Point icon.  
3. In the Contents area, select Hardware Service Functions. The LED  
Management window opens.  
4. In the LED Management window, select one of more managed systems from the  
table.  
5. Select Deactivate LED. The associated system attention LED is turned off.  
For more information about the operator panel as it relates to the HMC, see the IBM  
Hardware Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide, order  
number SA38-0590.  
v
v
As a user with root authority, enter diag on an AIX command line and do the  
following:  
1. Select Task Selection.  
2. On the task selection menu, select Identify and Attention Indicators.  
3. When the list of LEDs displays, use the cursor to highlight Set System Attention  
Indicator to Normal.  
4. Press Enter, and then press F7 to commit. This action turns off the LED.  
If the system is powered off, access the service processor menus and from the main  
menu do the following:  
1. Select System Information Menu.  
2. Select LED Control Menu.  
3. Select Clear System Attention Indicator. This will turn the LED off.  
For more information regarding the LED, refer to Chapter 3, “Using the Service  
Processor” on page 15.  
12 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Understanding the Power-On Self-Test (POST)  
After power is turned on and before the operating system is loaded, the partition does a  
power-on self-test (POST). This test performs checks to ensure that the hardware is  
functioning correctly before the operating system is loaded. During the POST, a POST  
screen displays, and POST indicators appear on the virtual terminal window. The next  
section describes the POST indicators and functions that can be accessed during the  
POST.  
POST Indicators  
POST indicators indicate tests that are being performed as the partition is preparing to  
load the operating system. The POST indicators are words that display on the virtual  
terminal window. Each time that the firmware starts another different step in the POST,  
a POST indicator word appears on the console. Each word is an indicator of the tests  
that are being performed.  
The POST screen displays the following words:  
Memory  
Memory test  
Keyboard  
Initialize the keyboard and mouse. The time period for pressing a key to  
access the System Management Services, or to initiate a service mode boot is  
now open. See “POST Keys” for more information.  
Network  
Self-test on network adapters  
SCSI  
Adapters are being initialized  
Speaker  
Sounds an audible tone at the end of POST  
POST Keys  
The POST keys, if pressed after the keyboard POST indicator displays and before the  
last (speaker) POST indicator displays, cause the system to start services or to initiate  
service mode boots used for configuring the system and diagnosing problems. The keys  
are described below:  
Note: The program function keys (F1-F12) on a keyboard attached to the HMC or USB  
card are not used and will be ignored. After the keyboard POST indicator  
displays, you must use the numeric number keys to enter input.  
1 Key  
The numeric 1 key, when pressed during POST, starts the System Management  
Services (SMS) interface.  
5 Key  
The numeric 5 key, when pressed during POST, initiates a system boot in service mode  
using the default service mode boot list.  
Chapter 2. Using the Eserver pSeries 690 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6 Key  
The numeric 6 key works like the numeric 5 key, except that the firmware uses the  
customized service mode bootlist.  
8 Key  
This option is used by service personnel. To enter the open firmware command line,  
press the numeric 8 key after the word keyboard displays and before the last word  
speaker displays during startup. After you press the 8 key, the remaining POST  
indicators display until initialization completes.  
When initialization and POST are complete, the open firmware command line (an OK  
prompt) displays.  
This option should only be used by service personnel to obtain additional debug  
information.  
To exit from the open firmware command prompt, type reset-all or power off the  
system and reboot.  
14 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor  
Note: The information in this chapter regarding the configuring of serial ports, and  
modems attached to those serial ports, applies only to the serial ports (S1 and  
S2) on the primary I/O book (location U1.18-P1-H2). None of this information is  
applicable to the serial ports, or modems attached to those serial ports, on the  
Hardware Management Console for pSeries (HMC).  
Note: On some of the system management services (or service processor) screens,  
you will see the term LPAR, which is equivalent to the term partitioned system.  
The service processor runs on its own power boundary and continually monitors  
hardware attributes and the environmental conditions within the system. The service  
processor is controlled by firmware and does not require the AIX operating system to be  
operational to perform its tasks.  
The service processor menus allow you to configure service processor options, as well  
as enable and disable functions.  
Service processor menus are available using an HMC virtual terminal window when OK  
is displayed on the operator panel or when the service processor has detected a server  
problem (such as a surveillance failure).  
Service Processor Menus  
The service processor menus are divided into the following groups:  
v
v
General user menu - the user must know the general-access password.  
Privileged user menus - the user must know the privileged-access password.  
If the server is powered off, the service processor menus can be accessed locally or  
remotely on the following:  
v
v
v
Serial port 1 (S1)  
Serial port 2 (S2)  
The HMC  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Locally  
Service processor menus can be accessed by opening a virtual terminal window on the  
HMC, or by attaching an ASCII terminal to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2 (S2). After  
OK displays in the operator panel, press any key on the keyboard to signal the service.  
Note: The service processor menus cannot be accessed simultaneously on a virtual  
terminal window on the HMC and on an ASCII terminal. Accessing the menus on  
the HMC locks out access to the ASCII terminals and the other way around.  
When you gain access, the service processor prompts you for a password (if one is  
set), and when verified, displays the service processor menus.  
The service processor menu prompt, represented by 0> or 1>, indicates the serial port  
to which the terminal is connected.  
v
An ASCII terminal can have the following prompts:  
–
–
0> indicates serial port 1 (S1)  
1> indicates serial port 2 (S2)  
v
The HMC always indicates 0>  
Accessing the Service Processor Menus Remotely  
If your system has a modem connected to serial port 1 or serial port 2 and is configured  
for call-in (see “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 45), access the service processor  
menus remotely as follows:  
1. With the system powered off, call in from a remote terminal.  
2. The service processor detects ring-indicate and prompts you for a password (if one  
is set). When verified, the service processor menus display remotely.  
Saving and Restoring Service Processor Settings  
All the settings that you make (except language) from the service processor menus can  
be backed up either for recovering from a fault that may corrupt these settings, or for  
replicating these settings to other servers that include a service processor.  
The service aid, Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies, can be used to save  
your settings after initial setup or whenever the settings must be changed for system  
operation purposes.  
It is strongly recommended that you use this service aid for backing up service  
processor settings to protect the usefulness of the service processor and the availability  
of the server. Refer to “Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies,” in  
“Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids” for information about this service aid.  
Menu Inactivity  
The service processor exits menu mode after ten minutes of inactivity and displays a  
message indicating that it has done so. Pressing any key on the virtual terminal window  
causes the main menu to display.  
16 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
General User Menu  
The menu options presented to the general user are a subset of the options available to  
the privileged user. The user must know the general-access password, if one is set, to  
access this menu.  
GENERAL USER MENU  
1. Power-on System  
2. Power-off System  
3. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
4. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
5. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
6. Read System POST Errors  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
v
Power-on System  
Allows the user to start the system using the current virtual terminal window as the  
active console.  
v
v
Power-off System  
This option is not available on this system.  
Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
Displays manufacturer vital product data, such as serial numbers, part numbers, and  
so on, that were stored from the system boot prior to the one in progress now, for the  
entire system.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays a number of the boot progress indicators, which may include service  
processor checkpoints, IPL checkpoints, or AIX configuration codes, from the  
previous system boot. This information can be useful in diagnosing system faults.  
Note: If you are running one or more logical partitions, enter the partition ID (0-15)  
to display progress indicators for that partition since the last system boot. If  
your system is running in full system partition mode, this option automatically  
displays details from partition 0.  
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).  
This information is not stored in nonvolatile storage. If the system is powered off  
using the power-on button on the operator panel, this information is retained. If the  
ac power is disconnected from the system, this information will be lost. For an  
example, refer to “LCD Progress Indicator Log” on page 61.  
v
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
Displays the service processor error logs. For an example, refer to “Service  
Processor Error Logs” on page 60.  
v
v
Read System POST Errors  
Displays additional error log information (this option is only for service personnel).  
Exit from Menus  
Selecting this option will exit the service processor menus. You can re-enter the  
menus by pressing any key on the console.  
18 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Privileged User Menus  
The following menus are available to privileged users only. The user must know the  
privileged-access password, if one is set, to access these menus.  
Main Menu  
A listing at the top of the main menu contains the following:  
v
v
v
Your system’s current firmware version  
The firmware copyright notice  
The system name given to your server during setup  
You need the firmware version for reference when you either update or repair the  
functions of your service processor.  
The system name, an optional field, is the name that your server reports in problem  
messages. This name helps your support team (for example, your system administrator,  
network administrator, or service representative) to more quickly identify the location,  
configuration, and history of your server. Set the system name, from the main menu,  
using option 6.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The information under the Service Processor Firmware heading in the following  
Main Menu illustration is example information only.  
Service Processor Firmware  
VERSION: RH011007  
Copyright 2001 IBM Corporation  
SYSTEM NAME  
MAIN MENU  
1. Service Processor Setup Menu  
2. System Power Control Menu  
3. System Information Menu  
4. Language Selection Menu  
5. Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
6. Set System Name  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
v
v
v
v
v
v
Service Processor Setup Menu  
See “Service Processor Setup Menu” on page 21 for more information.  
System Power Control Menu  
See “System Power Control Menu” on page 27 for more information.  
System Information Menu  
See “System Information Menu” on page 32 for more information.  
Language Selection Menu  
See “Language Selection Menu” on page 42 for more information.  
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
See “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 44 for more information.  
Set System Name  
Allows setting of the system name.  
20 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Setup Menu  
The following Service Processor Setup Menu is accessed from the Main Menu:  
SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU  
1. Change Privileged Access Password  
2. Change General Access Password  
3. Enable/Disable Console Mirroring:  
Currently Enabled  
4. Start Talk Mode  
5. OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
NOT supported in LPAR mode.  
6. Reset Service Processor  
7. Reprogram Flash EPROM Menu  
8. Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu  
NOT supported in LPAR mode.  
9. Scan Log Dump Policy:  
Currently Never  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
Note: Unless otherwise stated in menu responses, settings become effective when a  
menu is exited using option 98 or 99.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Passwords  
Passwords can be any combination of up to eight alphanumeric characters. You can  
enter longer passwords, but the entries are truncated to include only the first eight  
characters. The privileged-access password can be set from service processor menus  
or from System Management Services (SMS) utilities (see Chapter 4, “Using System  
Management Services” on page 67). The general-access password can be set only  
from service processor menus.  
For security purposes, the service processor counts the number of attempts to enter  
passwords. The results of not recognizing a password within this error threshold are  
different, depending on whether the attempts are being made locally (at the server) or  
remotely (through a modem). The error threshold is three attempts.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords at the server, the  
service processor commands the server to resume the initial program load (IPL). This  
action is taken based on the assumption that the server is in an adequately secure  
location with only authorized users having access. Such users must still successfully  
enter a login password to access AIX.  
If the error threshold is reached by someone entering passwords remotely, the service  
processor commands the server to power off to prevent potential security attacks on the  
server by unauthorized remote users. The following table lists what you can access with  
the privileged-access password and the general-access password.  
Privileged  
Access  
General  
Access  
Resulting Menu  
Password  
Password  
None  
Set  
None  
None  
Service processor MAIN MENU displays.  
Users with the password see the service processor  
MAIN MENU. Users without password cannot log in.  
Set  
Set  
Users see menus associated with the entered  
password.  
22 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Change Privileged-Access Password  
Set or change the privileged-access password. It provides the user with the capability  
to access all service processor functions. This password is usually used by the  
system administrator or root user.  
Change General-Access Password  
Set or change the general-access password. It provides limited access to service  
processor menus, and is usually available to all users who are allowed to power on  
the server, especially remotely.  
Note: The general-access password can only be set or changed after the privileged  
access password is set.  
v
Enable/Disable Console Mirroring  
Note: Console mirroring is disabled in partitioned systems.  
Console mirroring is supported on serial port 1 (S1) and serial port 2 (S2). When  
console mirroring is enabled, the service processor sends information to all serial  
ports. The serial port from which console mirroring is enabled is referred to as the  
active port. The mirror port is determined when keyboard input is detected from one  
of the other ports. From this point on, the service processor sends information only to  
the active port and the mirror port. This capability can be enabled by local or remote  
users, providing local users with the capability to monitor remote sessions. Console  
mirroring can be enabled for the current session only. For more information, see  
“Console Mirroring” on page 59.  
v
Start Talk Mode  
In a console-mirroring session, it is useful for those who are monitoring the session  
to be able to communicate with each other. Selecting Start Talk Mode activates the  
keyboards and displays for such communications while console mirroring is  
established. This is a full duplex link, so message interference is possible. Alternating  
messages between users works best.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
Note: This option is disabled in partitioned systems.  
This menu can be used to set up operating system (OS) surveillance.  
OS Surveillance Setup Menu  
1. Surveillance:  
Currently Enabled  
2. Surveillance Time Interval:  
2 minutes  
3. Surveillance Delay:  
2 minutes  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
–
–
–
Surveillance  
Can be set to Enabled or Disabled.  
Surveillance Time Interval  
Can be set to any number from 2 through 255.  
Surveillance Delay  
Can be set to any number from 0 through 255.  
Refer to “Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance” on page 56 for more  
information about surveillance.  
v
v
Reset Service Processor  
If this option is selected, entering Y causes the service processor to reboot.  
Reprogram Flash EPROM Menu  
This option updates the system EPROMs. After entering Y to indicate that you want  
to continue, you are prompted to enter the update diskettes. Follow the instructions  
on the screen. When the update is complete, the service processor reboots.  
All system EPROMs that can be reprogrammed are updated at the same time and  
are as follows:  
–
–
–
–
System power control network programming  
Service processor programming  
System firmware programming  
Run-Time Abstraction Services  
24 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu  
Note: This option is disabled in partitioned systems.  
This menu can be used to set up serial port snooping, in which the user can  
configure serial port 1 as a ″catch-all″ reset device.  
From the service processor main menu, select option 1, service processor setup  
menu, then select option 8 (Serial Port Snoop Setup Menu).  
SERIAL PORT SNOOP SETUP MENU  
1. System reset string:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Snoop Serial Port:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
1>  
Use the Snoop Serial Port option to select the serial port to snoop.  
Note: Only serial port 1 is supported.  
Use the system reset string option to enter the system reset string, which resets the  
machine when it is detected on the main console on Serial Port 1.  
After serial port snooping is correctly configured, at any point after the system is  
booted to AIX, whenever the reset string is typed on the main console, the system  
uses the service processor reboot policy to restart.  
Because pressing Enter after the reset string is not required, make sure that the  
string is not common or trivial. A mixed-case string is recommended.  
v
Scan Log Dump Policy  
A scan dump is the collection of chip data that the service processor gathers after a  
system malfunction, such as a checkstop or hang. The scan dump data may contain  
chip scan rings, chip trace arrays, and SCOM contents.  
The scan dump data are stored in the system control store. The size of the scan  
dump area is approximately 4 MB.  
During the scan log dump, A8xx (in the range A810 to A8FF) displays in the operator  
panel. The xx characters will change as the scan log dump progresses. If the xx  
characters do not change after several minutes, the service processor is hung and  
must be reset.  
When the scan log dump is complete, depending on how the reboot policy is set, the  
system will either:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
–
Go to the standby state (and the service processor menus will be available),  
indicated by OK or STBY in the operator panel  
OR  
–
Attempt to reboot.  
Scan Log Dump Policy Menu  
1. Scan Log Dump Policy:  
Currently Never  
2. Scan Log Dump Content:  
Not Applicable  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
Option 1 displays the following screen:  
Select from the following options:  
(As needed=1, Never=2, Always=3, Immediate=4)  
Enter new option:  
0>  
The scan log dump policy can be set to the following:  
1 = As needed  
The processor run-time diagnostics record the dump data based on the  
error type. Selecting this option will set the scan log dump policy to ″Not  
Applicable″. This is the default value.  
2 = Never  
Selecting this option will set the scan log dump policy to ″Not Applicable″.  
3 = Always  
Selecting this option will set the scan log dump policy to ″Currently  
Checkstop Hardware Abbreviated″; this is the default. However, if the dump  
policy is set to always, the scan log dump content can be changed, by  
selecting option 2, to either ″abbreviated″ or ″complete″. Selecting  
″complete″ will result in more data being stored in a larger scan dump, but  
the scan dump operation will take longer.  
4 = Immediately  
This option can only be used when the system is in the standby state with  
power on. It is used to dump the system data after a checkstop or machine  
check occurs when the system firmware is running, or when the operating  
system is booting or running.  
The scan log dump policy can also be set from the Tasks menu in the AIX service  
aids.  
26 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Power Control Menu  
This menu is used to set power control options. Other menus that control boot options  
are available from this menu.  
SYSTEM POWER CONTROL MENU  
1. Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode:  
Currently Enabled  
2. Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
3. Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
4. Power-On System  
5. Power-Off System  
6. Enable/Disable Fast System Boot  
Currently Enabled  
7. Boot Mode Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
v
Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode  
Use this option to instruct the service processor to restore the power state of the  
server after a temporary power failure. Unattended start mode can also be set  
through the System Management Services (SMS) menus. This option is intended to  
be used on servers that require automatic power-on after a power failure. For more  
information, see “System Power-On Methods” on page 50.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Ring Indicate Power-On Menu  
RING INDICATE POWER-ON MENU  
1. Ring indicate power-on :  
Currently Enabled  
2. Number of rings:  
Currently  
3
30. Refresh Modem Settings  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
Ring indicate power-on is enabled by default on both serial port 1 (S1) and serial port  
2 (S2). When ring indicate power-on is enabled, call-in is disabled.  
If ring indicate power-on is enabled and call-in is already enabled, you will be asked  
to confirm your choice. Refer to the message displayed on your screen.  
If the ring indicate power-on setting is changed, you must select option 30, Refresh  
Modem Settings to update the modem settings. If Refresh Modem Settings is  
selected, and the modem(s) have not been configured, you will be asked to configure  
the modems first. See “Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu” on page 44 for information on  
configuring modems.  
Option 2 is used to set the number of rings.  
28 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
The following menu controls the Reboot/Restart Policy:  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu  
1. Number of reboot attempts:  
Currently 1  
2. Use OS-Defined restart policy?  
Currently No  
3. Enable supplemental restart policy?  
Currently Yes  
4. Call-Out before restart:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
Reboot is the process of bringing up the system hardware; for example, from a  
system reset or power on. Restart is activating the operating system after the system  
hardware is reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
–
Number of reboot attempts - If the server fails to successfully complete the boot  
process, it attempts to reboot the number of times specified. Entry values equal to  
or greater than 0 are valid. Only successive failed reboot/restart attempts are  
counted.  
–
Use OS-Defined restart policy - In a full system partition, this allows the service  
processor to react in the same way that the operating system does to major  
system faults by reading the setting of the operating system parameter  
Automatically Restart/Reboot After a System Crash. This parameter might  
already be defined, depending on the operating system or its version (or level). If  
the operating system automatic restart setting is defined, it can be set to respond  
to a major fault by restarting or by not restarting. See your operating system  
documentation for details on setting up operating system automatic restarts. The  
default value is No.  
On a partitioned system, this setting is ignored.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
–
Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is Yes. When set to  
Yes in a full system partition, the service processor restarts the system when the  
system loses control as detected by service processor surveillance, and either:  
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to No.  
OR  
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to Yes and the operating system has  
no automatic restart policy.  
If set to Yes on a partitioned system, the service processor restarts the system  
when the system loses control and it is detected by service processor  
surveillance.  
–
Call-Out before restart (Enabled/Disabled) - If a restart is necessary due to a  
system fault, and you are running a full system partition, you can enable the  
service processor to call out and report the event. This option can be valuable if  
the number of these events becomes excessive, which might signal a bigger  
problem.  
This setting is ignored on a partitioned system.  
v
v
v
Power-On System  
Allows immediate power-on of the system.  
Power-Off System  
This option is not available on this system.  
Enable/Disable Fast System Boot  
Allows the user to select the IPL type, mode, and speed of the system boot.  
Attention: Selecting the fast IPL results in several diagnostic tests being skipped  
and a shorter memory test being run.  
30 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
Boot Mode Menu  
Note: This option is disabled in partitioned systems.  
The Boot Mode Menu allows you to select a boot mode.  
Boot Mode Menu  
1. Boot to SMS Menu:  
Currently Disabled  
2. Service Mode Boot from Saved List:  
Currently Disabled  
3. Service Mode Boot from Default List:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Boot to Open Firmware Prompt:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
To select a boot mode, select a number and press Enter. The item corresponding to  
the selected number toggles between Disabled to Enabled. If a boot mode is  
Enabled, the boot mode selected is performed, and the Disabled/Enabled selection is  
reset to Disabled. The following describes each boot mode:  
–
Boot to SMS Menu  
When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the System Management  
Services (SMS) Menu.  
–
Service Mode Boot from Saved List  
This selection causes the system to perform a service mode boot using the  
service mode boot list saved in NVRAM. If the system boots AIX from the disk  
drive and AIX diagnostics are loaded on the disk drive, AIX boots to the  
diagnostics menu.  
Using this option to boot the system is the preferred way to run online diagnostics.  
–
–
Service Mode Boot from Default List  
This selection is similar to Service Mode Boot from Saved List, except the system  
boots using the default boot list that is stored in the system firmware. This is  
normally used to try to boot customer diagnostics from the CD-ROM drive.  
Using this option to boot the system is the preferred way to run standalone  
diagnostics.  
Boot to Open Firmware  
This option should only be used by service personnel to obtain additional debug  
information. When this selection is enabled, the system boots to the open  
firmware prompt.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Information Menu  
This menu provides access to system configuration information, error logs, system  
resources, and processor configuration.  
SYSTEM INFORMATION MENU  
1. Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
2. Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
3. Read Service Processor Error Logs  
4. Read System POST Errors  
5. Read NVRAM  
6. Read Service Processor Configuration  
7. Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
8. Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
9. Power Control Network Utilities Menu  
10. LED Control Menu  
11. MCM/L3 Interposer Plug Count Menu  
12. Performance Mode Setup Menu  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
v
v
Read VPD Image from Last System Boot  
Displays manufacturer’s vital product data (VPD), such as serial numbers, part  
numbers, and so on, that was stored from the system boot prior to the one in  
progress now. VPD from all devices in the system is displayed.  
Read Progress Indicators from Last System Boot  
Displays a number of the boot progress indicators, which may include service  
processor checkpoints, IPL checkpoints, or AIX configuration codes, from the  
previous system boot. This information can be useful in diagnosing system faults.  
Note: If you are running from a partitioned system, enter the partition ID (0-15) to  
display progress indicators for that partition since the last system boot. In a  
full system partition, this option automatically displays details from partition 0.  
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).  
This information is not stored in nonvolatile storage. If the system is powered off  
using the power-on button on the operator panel, this information is retained. If the  
ac power is disconnected from the system, this information will be lost. For an  
example, refer to “LCD Progress Indicator Log” on page 61.  
v
Read Service Processor Error Logs  
32 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Displays error conditions detected by the service processor. Refer to “Service  
Processor Error Logs” on page 60 for an example of this error log.  
v
Read System POST Errors  
This option should only be used by service personnel to obtain additional debug  
information.  
v
v
v
Read NVRAM  
Displays Non Volatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM) content.  
Read Service Processor Configuration  
Displays current service processor configuration.  
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
Enable/Disable CPU Repeat Gard  
CPU repeat gard automatically deconfigures a CPU during a system boot if  
a processor has failed BIST POST, caused a machine check or check stop,  
or has reached a threshold of recoverable errors. The processor will remain  
deconfigured until repeat gard is disabled or the processor is replaced.  
Repeat gard is enabled by default.  
For more information, see “Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or  
Memory” on page 55.  
Enable/Disable Dynamic Processor Sparing  
This option is part of the Capacity Upgrade on Demand (CUoD) function.  
Dynamic Processor Sparing is the capability of the system to deconfigure a  
failing (or potentially failing) processor and then configure a replacement  
processor from the unlicensed CUoD processor pool.  
If the system is running logical partitions, the hot sparing operation takes  
place while the system is running. If the system is booted in a full system  
partition, the system must be rebooted for the processor sparing operation  
to take place.  
Processor hot sparing is enabled by default.  
Note: The memory affinity of the failing processor is not taken into account  
when the replacement processor is assigned; the replacement  
processor is the next processor that is available.  
This menu allows the user to change the system processor configuration. If it is  
necessary to take one of the processors offline, use this menu to deconfigure the  
processor, and then reconfigure the processor at a later time. An example of this  
menu follows:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PROCESSOR CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU  
77. Enable/Disable CPU Repeat Gard: Currently Enabled  
78. Enable/Disable Processor Hot Sparing (if available): Currently Enabled  
1.  
3.  
5.  
7.  
0
2
4
6
3.0 (00) Configured by system  
3.2 (00) Configured by system  
3.4 (00) Configured by system  
3.6 (00) Configured by system  
2.  
4.  
6.  
8.  
1
3
5
7
3.1 (00) Deconfigured by system  
3.3 (00) Configured by system  
3.5 (00) Deconfigured by system  
3.7 (00) Configured by system  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
Note: This table is built from vital product data collected during the last boot  
sequence. The first time the system is powered on, or after the system’s  
nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) has been erased, this table may be empty. The  
table is rebuilt during the next boot into AIX.  
The fields of the previous table represent the following:  
Column 1  
(1.) Menu selection index.  
Column 2  
(0) Logical processor device number assigned by AIX. You can display  
these logical device numbers by issuing the following command on the AIX  
command line:  
lsdev -C | grep proc  
Column 3  
(3.0) Processor address list used by the service processor.  
Column 4  
(00) Error status of the processors.  
The error status of each processor is indicated by AB, where B indicates the number  
of errors and A indicates the type of error according to the following:  
1. Bring-up failure  
2. Run-time non-recoverable failure  
3. Run-time recoverable failure  
4. Group integrity failure  
5. Non-repeat-gardable error. The resource may be reconfigured on the next boot.  
A status of 00 indicates that the CPU has not had any errors logged against it by the  
service processor.  
To enable or disable CPU repeat gard, use menu option 77. The default is enabled.  
To enable or disable processor hot sparing, use option 78. The default is enabled.  
34 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If CPU repeat gard is disabled, processors that are in the ″deconfigured by system″  
state will be reconfigured. These reconfigured processors are then tested during the  
boot process, and if they pass, they remain online. If they fail the boot testing, they  
are deconfigured even though CPU repeat gard is disabled.  
The failure history of each CPU is retained. If a processor with a history of failures is  
brought back online by disabling repeat gard, it remains online if it passes testing  
during the boot process. However, if repeat gard is enabled, the processor is taken  
offline again because of its history of failures.  
Note: The processor numbering scheme used by the service processor is different  
from the numbering scheme used by AIX. To ensure that the correct processor  
is selected, consult the AIX documentation before configuring or deconfiguring  
a processor.  
Note: To determine the number of processors available to AIX, run the following  
command on the AIX command line: bindprocessor -q  
v
Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu  
Enable/Disable Memory Repeat Gard  
Memory repeat gard partially or fully deconfigures a memory book  
automatically during a system boot if a memory book has failed BIST POST,  
caused a machine check or checkstop, or has reached a threshold of  
recoverable errors. The memory will remain deconfigured until repeat gard is  
disabled or the memory book is replaced.  
Memory repeat gard is enabled by default.  
For more information, see “Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or  
Memory” on page 55.  
Runtime Recoverable Error Repeat Gard  
Runtime recoverable error repeat gard controls the deallocation of the  
memory if a recoverable error occurs during runtime. If a recoverable  
memory error occurs, and runtime recoverable error repeat gard is disabled,  
the system will continue running with no change in the memory  
configuration. If a recoverable memory error occurs, and runtime  
recoverable error repeat gard is enabled, the memory half-book or book in  
which the error occurred will be taken offline.  
Runtime Recoverabe Error Repeat Gard is disabled by default.  
These menus allow the user to change the system memory configuration. If it is  
necessary to take one of the memory books partially or completely offline, this menu  
allows you to deconfigure a book, and then reconfigure the book at a later time. This  
menu also allows you to see if the repeat gard function has partially or completely  
deconfigured a memory book.  
When this option is selected, a menu displays. The following is an example of this  
menu:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MEMORY CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU  
77. Enable/Disable Memory Repeat Gard: Currently Enabled  
78. Runtime Recoverable Error Repeat Gard: Currently Enabled  
1. Memory card  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
After you select the memory card option by entering 1, a menu displays, allowing the  
selection of a memory book. The following is an example of this menu.  
MEMORY CONFIGURATION/DECONFIGURATION MENU  
1: 16.16(00, -) Configured by system  
3: 18.18(00, -) Configured by system  
2: 17.17(00, -) Configured by system  
4: 19.19(00, 1) Partially deconfigured by system  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
Note: This table is built from vital product data collected during the last boot  
sequence. The first time the system is powered on, or after the system’s  
nonvolatile RAM (NVRAM) has been erased, this table may be empty. The  
table is rebuilt during the next boot into AIX.  
The fields in the previous table represent the following:  
Column 1  
1. Menu selection index/book number  
Column 2  
xx.xx : Book address used by service processor  
Column 3  
(00, -) Error/deconfiguration status  
The error status of the each memory book is indicated by (AB, -1) where B indicates  
the number of errors and A indicates the type of error according to the following:  
1. Bring-up failure  
2. Run-time non-recoverable failure  
3. Run-time recoverable failure  
4. Group integrity failure  
5. Non-repeat-gardable error. The resource may be reconfigured on the next boot.  
An error status of (00, -) (for example, 11.16(00, -)) indicates that the memory book  
has not had any errors logged against it by the service processor, and it is fully  
configured.  
The field after the error status will be a “-”, “0”, or “1”. The dash indicates that the  
memory book is fully configured. A zero or a one indicates that memory repeat gard  
36 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
has deconfigured half of the memory book. If this occurs, the status of the book in  
the menu is shown as “Partially deconfigured by system.”  
To change the memory configuration, select the number of the memory book. The  
memory book state will change from configured to deconfigured or from  
deconfigured to configured.  
This menu only allows the deconfiguration of an entire book; it does not allow the  
manual deconfiguration of half a book. If half a book has been configured by the  
sytem (“Partially deconfigured”), it can be manually reconfigured using this menu.  
In the previous example menu, each line shows two books and indicates whether  
they are configured, deconfigured, or partially deconfigured.  
To enable or disable Memory Repeat Gard, use menu option 77 of the Memory  
Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu. The default is enabled.  
To enable or disable runtime recoverable error repeat gard, use option 78 of the  
Memory Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu. The default is enabled.  
The failure history of each book is retained. If a book with a history of failures is  
brought back online by disabling Repeat Gard, it remains online if it passes testing  
during the boot process. However, if Repeat Gard is enabled, the book is taken  
offline again because of its history of failures.  
The four inner memory books, if present, are listed first, followed by the four outer  
books, if present. The memory books are shown in the following order of physical  
location code:  
1
2
3
4
U1.18-P1-M2  
U1.18-P1-M3  
U1.18-P1-M7  
U1.18-P1-M6  
5
6
7
8
U1.18-P1-M4  
U1.18-P1-M8  
U1.18-P1-M5  
U1.18-P1-M1  
v
Power Control Network Utilities Menu  
POWER CONTROL NETWORK UTILITIES MENU  
1. Lamp Test for all Operator Panels  
2. Display I/O Type  
Not Supported  
3. Change I/O Type  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
–
–
Lamp Test for All Operator Panels  
Selecting this option tests the media drawer operator panel’s indicators by causing  
them to blink on and off for approximately 30 seconds.  
Change I/O Type  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use this option to change the I/O type of the primary I/O book after a service  
action or configuration change if the I/O type is incorrect. If this option is chosen,  
you will be asked to make the following entries:  
-
-
For the I/O drawer address, type 1.  
For the I/O type, type 98.  
If either value is not valid, a failure message displays on the console. Press Enter  
to return to the Power Control Network Utilities Menu.  
v
LED Control Menu  
This menu displays the state of the processor subsystem disturbance or system  
attention LED and the fault/identify LED on the I/O subsystem(s). Use this menu to  
toggle the attention/fault LEDs between identify (blinking) and off. Option 1 is  
available only when the system is in the error state (the CEC is powered on and the  
service processor menus are available). Option 1 is not available when the system is  
in standby.  
An example of this menu follows:  
LED Control Menu  
1. Set/Reset Identify LED state  
2. Clear System Attention Indicator  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0 >  
The processor subsystem disturbance or system attention LED is located on the  
operator panel in the media drawer. The I/O drawer fault/identify LED is located on  
the front of each I/O subsystem.  
If option 1 is selected, a list of location codes of the I/O subsystems and the CEC  
drawer displays. The screen will be similar to the following:  
38 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1. U1.9-P1  
2. U1.9-P2  
3. U1.5-P1  
4. U1.5-P2  
5. U1.1-P1  
6. U1.1-P2  
7. U2.1-P1  
8. U2.1-P2  
9. U2.5-P1  
10. U2.5-P2  
Enter number corresponding to the location code, or  
press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to the menu.  
0>4  
If one of the devices is selected using the index number, the present state of its LED  
will be displayed, and you are given the option to toggle it, as shown in the following  
screen. The final state of the LED will then be displayed, whether or not it was  
changed.  
U1.5-P2 is currently in the OFF state  
Select from the following (1=IDENTIFY ON, 2=IDENTIFY OFF)  
0>2  
Please wait...  
U1.5-P2 is currently in the OFF state  
(Press Return to continue)  
Option 2, Clear System Attention Indicator, will clear the attention indicator on the  
operator panel in the media drawer.  
v
MCM/L3 Interposer Plug Count Menu  
Attention: Do not power on the system when in this menu. Fully eixt this menu  
before powering on the system.  
This menu tracks the number of times that the MCM(s) and L3 cache modules have  
been plugged into the system backplane.  
If an MCM or L3 cache module is replaced the plug count for tha module must be  
incremented by 1. If the plug count exceeds the limit of 10 (reaches 11 or greater), a  
450x yyyy or 4B2x yyyy error with a detail value of CFF0 that calls out an MCM or  
L3 cache module will be posted in the service processor error log. The FRU should  
be replaced during a deferred service call.  
If an MCM or L3 cache module is replaced, or installed during an MES upgrade, the  
plug count must be set using the interposer plug count menu. If the plug count  
information is not inclueded with the new or replacement module, enter the default  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
value of 7. If the plug count is not entered, a B1xx 4698 error code, with a detail  
value of E10B or E10C, will be posted in the service processor error log.  
If the primary I/O book is replaced, the plug counts are retained. However the plug  
count menu must be accessed and option 50, ″Commit the values and write to the  
VPD,″ must be executed so that the plug counts are revalidated If the counts are not  
revalidated, a B1xx 4698 error code, with a detail value of E10B or E10C, will be  
posted in the service processor error log.  
Notes:  
1. The plug count will be zero for those positions in which L3 cache modules and  
MCMs have never been installed.  
2. If MCM and L3 modules are removed from the system and not replaced, those  
plug counts are retained until they are manually changed.  
A screen similar to the following will be displayed. In this example, all four MCMs and  
all 16 L3 modules are shown.  
MCM/L3 Interposer Plug Count Menu  
1. L3_13:7  
6. L3_14:7  
2. L3_0:7  
7. L3_3:7  
3. MCM_0:7  
4. L3_1:7  
8. L3_2:7  
5. L3_4:7  
9. L3_7:7  
10. MCM_3:1  
11. MCM_2:1  
12. L3_15:7 13. L3_10:7 14. MCM_1:7  
17. L3_12:7 18. L3_9:7  
15. L3_11:7 16. L3_6:7  
19. L3_8:7 20. L3_5:7  
50. Commit the values and write to the VPD  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
The format of the preceding menu entries is the menu index number, followed by  
L3_xx, followed by the plug count after the colon. The following table correlates the  
preceding information with the physical location codes.  
Menu Index Number  
1. L3_13  
2. L3_0  
Physical Location Code  
U1.18-P1-C5  
U1.18-P1-C6  
3. MCM_0  
4. L3_1  
U1.18-P1-C1  
U1.18-P1-C7  
5. L3_4  
U1.18-P1-C8  
6. L3_14  
7. L3_3  
U1.18-P1-C9  
U1.18-P1-C10  
U1.18-P1-C11  
U1.18-P1-C12  
8. L3_2  
9. L3_7  
40 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. MCM_3  
11. MCM_2  
12. L3_15  
13. L3_10  
14. MCM_1  
15. L3_11  
16. L3_6  
U1.18-P1-C2  
U1.18-P1-C3  
U1.18-P1-C13  
U1.18-P1-C14  
U1.18-P1-C4  
U1.18-P1-C15  
U1.18-P1-C16  
U1.18-P1-C17  
U1.18-P1-C18  
U1.18-P1-C19  
U1.18-P1-C20  
17. L3_12  
18. L3_9  
19. L3_8  
20. L3_5  
To change the plug count for a particular module, enter a menu index number. For  
example, to change the plug count of the L3 module that is physically in the  
upper-right corner (U1.18-P1-C8), type 5, then enter the new plug count.  
When all of the new plug counts have been entered, select 50, Commit the values  
and write to the VPD. This action stores the new values in NVRAM.  
v
Performance Mode Setup Menu  
If certain types of processor cards are installed in the system, this menu is ″not  
applicable.″ For other types of processor cards, this menu will be active after the first  
boot as noted below.  
Note: The first time the system is booted after NVRAM is cleared, ″Not Applicable″  
will display under ″Performance Mode Setup Menu″ on the screen. This may  
also happen if the service processor is replaced, or the processor MCMs are  
upgraded.  
If option 12 is selected when ″Not Applicable″ is on the screen, the system will  
respond with ″Not Applicable″ and redisplay the system information menu.  
The setup menu can be displayed after the performance mode is set, which  
happens the first time the system is booted.  
The default performance mode is set by the firmware during IPL. The default mode  
provides the optimum performance for the hardware configuration of the system. The  
performance mode is systemwide; it cannot be set on a per-partition basis.  
You can override the default setting by using the performance mode setup menu.  
The performance mode setup menu will be similar to the following:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Performance Mode: Large Commercial System optimization  
1. Current Performance Mode:  
Large Commercial System optimization  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>1  
Selecting option 1 displays the following performance modes:  
Select from the following options:  
1. Large Commercial System optimization  
2. Standard Operation  
3. Turbo Database Mode  
0>  
Notes:  
1. Some MCM configuration changes, such as going from an 8-way to a 24-way  
system, will cause the default performance mode to change. This new setting will  
not be reflected in the menu until after the system is rebooted with the new  
configuration.  
2. If the NVRAM has been cleared, the default performance mode and the current  
performance mode will indicate uninitialized.  
To override the default setting, a brief description of each performance mode follows:  
–
–
–
Large commercial system optimization is the setting for systems that do not fall  
into the other two categories, standard operation and turbo database mode. This  
setting provides the best performance for most applications.  
Standard operation optimizes the system for large memory bandwidth applications  
where minimal sharing of data occurs and the likelihood of significant hardware  
data-prefetching exists.  
Turbo database mode optimizes system operation for environments where there is  
a large amount of data sharing among processes running concurrently on the  
system.  
Language Selection Menu  
The service processor menus and messages are available in various languages. This  
menu allows selecting languages in which the service processor and system firmware  
menus and messages are displayed.  
42 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LANGUAGE SELECTION MENU  
1. English  
2. Francais  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italiano  
5. Espanol  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
Note: Your virtual terminal window must support the ISO-8859 character set to  
correctly display languages other than English.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Call-In/Call-Out Setup Menu  
Note: The information in this section regarding the configuring of serial ports, and  
modems attached to those serial ports, applies only to the serial ports (S1 and  
S2) on the primary I/O book (location U1.18-P1-H2). These serial ports are  
normally used for call-in and call-out.  
Call-out is disabled in partitioned systems. The call-out function is normally  
handled by the Service Focal Point application running on the HMC.  
None of these menus are applicable to the serial ports, or modems attached to  
those serial ports, on the hardware management console (HMC).  
CALL-IN/CALL-OUT SETUP MENU  
1. Modem Configuration Menu  
2. Serial Port Selection Menu  
3. Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
4. Telephone Number Setup Menu  
5. Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
6. Customer Account Setup Menu  
7. Call-Out Test  
NOT supported in LPAR mode.  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
99. Exit from Menus  
0>  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Modem Configuration Menu, see “Modem Configuration Menu” on page 45.  
Serial Port Selection Menu, see “Serial Port Selection Menu” on page 46.  
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu, see “Serial Port Speed Setup Menu” on page 47.  
Telephone Number Setup Menu, see “Telephone Number Setup Menu” on page 47.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu, see “Call-Out Policy Setup Menu” on page 49.  
Customer Account Setup Menu, see “Customer Account Setup Menu” on page 50.  
Call-Out Test tests the configuration after the modem is installed and configured  
correctly.  
Note: If the system is running in partition mode, the call-out option is disabled.  
44 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modem Configuration Menu  
Note: This option applies only to a modem attached to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2  
(S2) on the primary I/O book.  
The first two lines of the Modem Configuration Menu contain status of the current  
selections. Selections are made in the sections labeled Modem Ports and Modem  
Configuration File Name. Select the serial port that you want to activate and then select  
the modem configuration file for the modem on the port. If you want to set up all of the  
serial ports with modems, make your selections one port at a time.  
Modem Configuration Menu  
Port 1 Modem Configuration File Name:  
Port 2 Modem Configuration File Name:  
To make changes, First select the port and then the configuration file  
name  
Modem Ports:  
1. Serial port 1  
2. Serial port 2  
Modem Configuration File Name:  
5. none9. modem_z_sp  
6. modem_f_sp  
7. modem_f0_sp  
8. modem_f1_sp  
10. modem_m1_sp  
11. modem_m0_sp  
12. modem_m1_sp  
30. Save configuration to NVRAM and Configure modem  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
For information on choosing a modem configuration file, see “Sample Modem  
Configuration Files” on page 163 and “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 169.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Selection Menu  
This menu allows you to enable or disable the call-in and call-out functions of each  
serial port in any combination.  
Note: If the system is running in partition mode, call-out is disabled.  
Serial Port Selection Menu  
1. Serial Port 1 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
NOT supported in LPAR mode.  
2. Serial Port 2 Call-Out:  
Currently Disabled  
NOT supported in LPAR mode.  
3. Serial Port 1 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
4. Serial Port 2 Call-In:  
Currently Disabled  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
Call-in and ring indicate power-on cannot be enabled at the same time. If ring-indicate  
power-on is already enabled and you try to enable call-in, a message prompts you for  
confirmation. Refer to the message displayed on the screen.  
46 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
This menu allows you to set serial port speed to enhance terminal performance or to  
accommodate modem capabilities.  
Serial Port Speed Setup Menu  
1. Serial Port 1 Speed:  
Currently 9600  
2. Serial Port 2 Speed:  
Currently 9600  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
A serial port speed of 9600 baud or higher is recommended. The following are valid  
serial port speeds:  
50  
600  
4800  
75  
1200  
1800  
2000  
2400  
3600  
7200  
110  
134  
150  
300  
9600  
19200  
38000  
57600  
115200  
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
Note: These menus are available, however, the function of calling out to report a  
system failure is normally handled by the Service Focal Point application running  
on the HMC.  
Use this menu to set or change the telephone numbers for reporting a system failure.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Telephone Number Setup Menu  
1. Service Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer Administration Center Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Digital Pager Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
4. Customer Voice Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
5. Customer System Telephone Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
v
Service Center Telephone Number is the number of the service center computer.  
The service center usually includes a computer that takes calls from servers with  
call-out capability. This computer is referred to as the ″catcher.″ The catcher expects  
messages in a specific format to which the service processor conforms.  
For more information about the format and catcher computers, refer to the README  
file in the AIX /usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact your service provider for the  
correct service center telephone number to enter. Until you have that number, leave  
this field unassigned.  
v
v
Customer Administration Center Telephone Number is the number of the System  
Administration Center computer (catcher) that receives problem calls from servers.  
Contact your system administrator for the correct telephone number to enter here.  
Until you have that number, leave this field unassigned.  
Digital Pager Telephone Number is the number for a numeric pager carried by  
someone who responds to problem calls from your server. Contact your  
administration center representative for the correct telephone number to enter. For  
test purposes, use a test number, which you can change later (see the note on page  
58).  
Note: If the system is running in partition mode, call-out is disabled. However, if the  
system is booted in full system partition mode, at least one of the preceding  
three telephone numbers must be assigned in order for the call-out test to  
complete successfully.  
48 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
v
Customer Voice Telephone Number is the telephone number of a phone near the  
server or answered by someone responsible for the server. This is the telephone  
number left on the pager for callback. For test purposes, use a test number, which  
you can change later.  
Customer System Telephone Number is the telephone number to which your  
server’s modem is connected. The service or administrative center representatives  
need this number to make direct contact with your server for problem investigation.  
This is also referred to as the call-in phone number.  
Call-Out Policy Setup Menu  
Note: Call-out is disabled in partitioned systems.  
Call out settings can be set using the following menu:  
CALL-OUT POLICY SETUP MENU  
1. Call-Out policy (First/All):  
Currently First  
2. Remote timeout, (in seconds):  
Currently 120  
3. Remote latency, (in seconds):  
Currently 2  
4. Number of retries:  
Currently 2  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
v
Call-Out policy can be set to first or all. If call-out policy is set to first, the  
service processor stops at the first successful call-out to one of the following  
numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administrative Center  
3. Pager  
If call-out policy is set to all, the service processor attempts a call-out to all of the  
following numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administrative Center  
3. Pager  
v
v
Remote timeout and remote latency are functions of your service provider’s catcher  
computer. Either use the defaults or contact your service provider for recommended  
settings.  
Number of retries is the number of times you want the server to retry calls that  
failed to complete.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customer Account Setup Menu  
This menu allows users to enter information that is specific to their account.  
Customer Account Setup Menu  
1. Customer Account Number:  
Currently Unassigned  
2. Customer RETAIN Login userid:  
Currently Unassigned  
3. Customer RETAIN login password:  
Currently Unassigned  
98. Return to Previous Menu  
0>  
v
v
Customer Account Number is assigned by your service provider for record-keeping  
and billing. If you have an account number, enter it. Otherwise, leave this field  
unassigned.  
Customer RETAIN Login User ID and Customer RETAIN Login Password apply  
to a service function to which your service provider might have access. Leave these  
fields unassigned if your service provider does not use RETAIN.  
Call-out Test  
Call-out test is disabled in partitioned systems.  
Service Processor Parameters in Service Mode (Full System Partition)  
When the system is in service mode, the following service processor functions are  
suspended:  
v
v
v
v
Unattended Start Mode  
Reboot/Restart Policy  
Call-Out  
Surveillance  
When service mode is exited, the service processor functions are re-activated.  
System Power-On Methods  
This section discusses the following system power-on methods:  
v
v
Power-on Switch  
Service Processor Menus  
Privileged users can power on the system by selecting the System Control Power  
Menu option from the main menu and then selecting the Power-on System option  
from the System Power Control Menu. General users should select Power-on  
System on the General User Menu.  
v
Remote Power-on via Ring-Indicate Signal  
50 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The server automatically powers on when it detects a ″ring indicate″ signal from a  
modem attached to serial port 1 (S1) or serial port 2 (S2).  
A remote user can call the server to activate ring detection by the modem. Listen for  
a few more rings than the threshold number for starting the system. The system  
powers on without answering the call.  
v
v
Unattended start mode - refer to Enable/Disable Unattended Start Mode on page  
27.  
The service processor can be enabled to recover from the loss of ac power (see  
Enable/Disable Unattended Power-On Mode in the SYSTEM POWER CONTROL  
MENU). When ac power is restored, the system returns to the power state at the  
time ac loss occurred. For example, if the system was powered on when ac loss  
occurred, it reboots/restarts when power is restored. If the system was powered off  
when ac loss occurred, it remains off when power is restored.  
Timed power-on - refer to the shutdown -t command on servers using AIX.  
Working in conjunction with AIX, the Service Processor in your server can operate a  
timer, much like the wake-up timer on your clock radio. You can set the timer so that  
your server powers on at a certain time after shutting down. The timer is  
battery-operated, so power interruptions that occur while the server is off do not  
affect its accuracy. Refer to the AIX shutdown -t command for details on setting the  
timer.  
Note: If an ac power loss (exceeding the hold-up time of any optional IBFs) is in  
progress when the timed power-on attempt occurs, the server cannot power  
on when ac power is restored.  
v
v
Follow-up to a Failed Boot Attempt  
The service processor initiates a power-on sequence if a failed boot attempt is  
detected (due to a hardware or software failure).  
Fast or Slow Boot (IPL)  
Using the service processor menus, you can select the IPL type, mode, and speed of  
your system.  
Attention: Selecting fast IPL results in several diagnostic tests being skipped and a  
shorter memory test being run.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery  
Reboot describes bringing the system hardware back up; for example, from a system  
reset or power-on. The boot process ends when control passes to the operating system  
process.  
Restart describes activating the operating system after the system hardware is  
reinitialized. Restart must follow a successful reboot.  
Boot (IPL) Speed  
When the server enters reboot recovery, slow IPL is automatically started, which gives  
the POST an opportunity to locate and report any problems that might otherwise be  
unreported.  
Failure During Boot Process  
During the boot process, either initially after system power-on or upon reboot after a  
system failure, the service processor monitors the boot progress. If progress stops, the  
service processor can reinitiate the boot process (reboot) if enabled to do so. The  
service processor can re-attempt this process according to the number of retries  
selected in the Reboot/Restart Policy Setup Menu.  
Failure During Normal System Operation  
When the boot process completes and control transfers to the operating system (OS),  
the service processor can monitor operating system activity (see the Set Surveillance  
Parameters option in the SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP MENU). If OS activity stops  
due to a hardware- or software-induced failure, the service processor can initiate a  
reboot/restart process based on the settings in the Service Processor Reboot/Restart  
Policy Setup Menu and the OS automatic restart settings (see the operating system  
documentation).  
If you are using the AIX operating system, the menu item under SMIT for setting the  
restart policy is Automatically Reboot After Crash. The default is false. When the  
setting is true, and if the service processor parameter ″Use OS-Defined Restart Policy″  
is yes (the default), the service processor takes over for AIX to reboot/restart after a  
hardware or surveillance failure.  
Service Processor Reboot/Restart Policy Controls  
The operating system’s automatic restart policy (see operating system documentation)  
indicates the operating system response to a system crash. The service processor can  
be instructed to refer to that policy by the Use OS-Defined Restart Policy setup menu.  
If the operating system has no automatic restart policy, or if it is disabled, then the  
service processor-restart policy can be controlled from the service processor menus.  
Use the Enable Supplemental Restart Policy selection.  
Use OS-Defined restart policy - The default setting is no. If set to yes on a full system  
partition, this causes the service processor to refer to the OS Automatic Restart Policy  
setting and take action (the same action the operating system would take if it could  
have responded to the problem causing the restart).  
52 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When this setting is no, or if the operating system did not set a policy, the service  
processor refers to enable supplemental restart policy for its action.  
This setting is ignored on a partitioned system.  
Enable supplemental restart policy - The default setting is yes. When set to yes on a  
full system partition, the service processor restarts the server when the operating  
system loses control and either:  
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to No.  
OR  
The Use OS-Defined restart policy is set to Yes and the operating system has no  
automatic restart policy.  
If set to Yes on a partitioned system, the service processor restarts the system when  
the system loses control and it is detected by service processor surveillance.  
Refer to “Service Processor Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 52.  
The following table describes the relationship among the operating system and service  
processor restart controls in a full system partition.  
OS Automatic  
Service processor to Service Processor  
System response  
reboot/restart  
after crash setting  
use OS-Defined  
restart policy?  
Enable supplemental  
restart policy?  
None  
None  
None  
None  
False2  
False2  
False2  
False2  
True  
No1  
No1  
Yes  
Yes  
No1  
No1  
Yes  
Yes  
No1  
No1  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Yes1  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
No  
Yes1  
No  
Yes1  
No  
Yes1  
No  
True  
Yes1  
Restarts  
Restarts  
Restarts  
True  
No  
True  
Yes1  
1
Service processor default  
2 AIX default  
In a partitioned system, the service processor’s supplemental restart policy is the only  
setting that is used, as shown in the following table:  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor enable supplemental  
restart policy  
System Response  
No  
Yes (default)  
Restarts  
54 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring and Deconfiguring Processors or Memory  
All failures that crash the system with a machine check or check stop, even if  
intermittent, are reported as a diagnostic callout for service repair. To prevent the  
recurrence of intermittent problems and improve the availability of the system until a  
scheduled maintenance window, processors and memory books with a failure history  
are marked ″bad″ to prevent their being configured on subsequent boots.  
A processor or memory book is marked ″bad″ under the following circumstances:  
v
A processor or memory book fails built-in self-test (BIST) or power-on self-test  
(POST) testing during boot (as determined by the service processor).  
v
A processor or memory book causes a machine check or check stop during runtime,  
and the failure can be isolated specifically to that processor or memory book (as  
determined by the processor runtime diagnostics in the service processor).  
v
A processor or memory book reaches a threshold of recovered failures that results in  
a predictive callout (as determined by the processor run-time diagnostics in the  
service processor).  
During boot time, the service processor does not configure processors or memory  
books that are marked “bad.”  
If a processor or memory book is deconfigured, the processor or memory book remains  
offline for subsequent reboots until it is replaced or repeat gard is disabled. The repeat  
gard function also provides the user with the option of manually deconfiguring a  
processor or memory book, or re-enabling a previously deconfigured processor or  
memory book. For information on configuring or deconfiguring a processor, see the  
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu on page 33.  
For information on configuring or deconfiguring a memory book, see the Memory  
Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu on page 35. Both of these menus are submenus  
under the System Information Menu.  
You can enable or disable CPU Repeat Gard or Memory Repeat Gard using the  
Processor Configuration/Deconfiguration Menu.  
Run-Time CPU Deconfiguration (CPU Gard)  
L1 instruction cache recoverable errors, L1 data cache correctable errors, and L2 cache  
correctable errors are monitored by the processor runtime diagnostics (PRD) code  
running in the service processor. When a predefined error threshold is met, an error log  
with warning severity and threshold exceeded status is returned to AIX. At the same  
time, PRD marks the CPU for deconfiguration at the next boot. AIX will attempt to  
migrate all resources associated with that processor to another processor and then stop  
the defective processor.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Processor System Monitoring - Surveillance  
Surveillance is a function in which the service processor monitors the system, and the  
system monitors the service processor. This monitoring is accomplished by periodic  
samplings called heartbeats.  
Surveillance is available during two phases:  
v
v
System firmware bringup (automatic)  
Operating system runtime (optional)  
Note: Operating system surveillance is disabled on partitioned systems.  
System Firmware Surveillance  
System firmware surveillance is automatically enabled during system power-on. It  
cannot be disabled by the user, and the surveillance interval and surveillance delay  
cannot be changed by the user.  
If the service processor detects no heartbeats during system IPL (for a set period of  
time), it cycles the system power to attempt a reboot. The maximum number of retries  
is set from the service processor menus. If the fail condition persists, the service  
processor leaves the machine powered on, logs an error, and displays menus to the  
user. If Call-out is enabled, the service processor calls to report the failure and displays  
the operating-system surveillance failure code on the operator panel.  
56 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Operating System Surveillance  
Note: Operating system surveillance is disabled in partitioned systems.  
Operating system surveillance provides the service processor with a means to detect  
hang conditions, as well as hardware or software failures, while the operating system is  
running. It also provides the operating system with a means to detect a service  
processor failure caused by the lack of a return heartbeat.  
Operating system surveillance is not enabled by default, allowing you to run operating  
systems that do not support this service processor option.  
You can also use service processor menus and AIX service aids to enable or disable  
operating system surveillance.  
For operating system surveillance to work correctly, you must set these parameters:  
v
v
Surveillance enable/disable  
Surveillance interval  
The maximum time the service processor should wait for a heartbeat from the  
operating system before timeout.  
v
Surveillance delay  
The length of time to wait from the time the operating system is started to when the  
first heartbeat is expected.  
Surveillance does not take effect until the next time the operating system is started after  
the parameters have been set.  
If desired, you can initiate surveillance mode immediately from service aids. In addition  
to the three options above, a fourth option allows you to select immediate surveillance,  
and rebooting of the system is not necessarily required.  
If operating system surveillance is enabled (and system firmware has passed control to  
the operating system), and the service processor does not detect any heartbeats from  
the operating system, the service processor assumes the system is hung and takes  
action according to the reboot/restart policy settings. See “Service Processor  
Reboot/Restart Recovery” on page 52.  
If surveillance is selected from the service processor menus which are only available at  
bootup, then surveillance is enabled by default as soon as the system boots. From  
service aids, the selection is optional.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Call-Out (Call-Home)  
Note: Call-out is disabled on partitioned systems. The call-out function is handled by  
the Service Focal Point application on the Hardware Management Console  
(HMC).  
The service processor can call out (call-home) when it detects one of the following  
conditions:  
v
v
v
v
v
System firmware surveillance failure  
Operating system surveillance failure (if supported by operating system)  
Restarts  
Critical hardware failure  
Abnormal operating system termination  
To enable the call-out feature, do the following:  
1. Connect a modem to any serial port.  
2. Set up the following using the service processor menus or diagnostic service aids:  
v
v
v
Enable call-out for the serial port where the modem is connected.  
Enter the modem configuration file name.  
Set up site-specific parameters (phone numbers for call-out, call-out policy,  
number of call-out retries, and so on).  
3. To call out before restart, set Call-out before restart to ENABLED from the  
Reboot/Restart Policy Setup menu.  
Note: Some modems, such as IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging function.  
Although they can be used for paging, they will return an error message when  
they do not get the expected response from another modem. Therefore, even  
though the paging was successful, the error message will cause the service  
processor to retry, continuing to place pager calls for the number of retries  
specified in the call-out policy setup menu. These retries result in redundant  
pages.  
58 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Console Mirroring  
Console mirroring allows a user on one serial port to monitor the service processor  
activities on another serial port. This can be done on the locally attached HMC virtual  
terminal window or windows remotely attached through modems. Console mirroring is  
supported on any combination of locally or remotely attached monitors.  
The serial port from which console mirroring is enabled is called the primary port. The  
mirror port is determined when keyboard input is detected from one of the other two  
serial ports. From this point forward, the service processor sends information to the  
active port and the mirror port only. Console mirroring ends when the service processor  
releases control of the serial ports to the system firmware.  
Console mirroring is supported on serial port 1 (S1), serial port 2 (S2), and serial port 3  
(S3). Remote attachment through a modem is supported on serial port 1 (S1) and serial  
port 2 (S2).  
System Configuration  
The following describes the configuration for console mirroring:  
v
v
v
Service processor  
Modem connected to one serial port and enabled for incoming calls  
Local HMC virtual terminal window connected to the other serial port. This local  
terminal can be connected directly to your server or connected through another  
modem.  
Console mirroring can be started by either of the following methods:  
v
Remote session first, then local session added:  
1. Remote session is already in progress.  
2. Remote user uses service processor menus to enable console mirroring, allowing  
both consoles to be active.  
v
Local session first, then remote session added:  
1. Local session is already in progress.  
2. The service processor receives a call from the remote user.  
3. The local user selects the option to enable console mirroring. The service  
processor immediately begins mirroring service processor menus.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Service Processor Error Logs  
The service processor error logs, an example of which follows, contain error conditions  
detected by the service processor.  
Error Log  
1. 11/30/99  
B1004999  
19:41:56 Service Processor Firmware Failure  
Enter error number for more details.  
Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu.  
Press "C" to clear error log, any other key to continue. >  
Note: The time stamp in this error log is coordinated universal time (UTC), which is  
also referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT). AIX error logs have additional  
information available and can time stamp with local time.  
Entering an error number provides nine words of system reference code (SRC) data; an  
example screen is shown below.  
Detail:  
SRC  
6005  
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -  
word11:B1004999  
word14:00000000  
word17:B1004AAA  
word12:0110005D  
word15:00001111  
word18:0114005D  
word13:00000000  
word16:00000000  
word19:A4F1E909  
B1004999  
Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu.  
If Return is pressed, the contents of NVRAM will be dumped 320 bytes at a time,  
starting at address 0000.  
60 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
LCD Progress Indicator Log  
The following is an example of the LCD progress indicator log. It shows the types of  
entries that may appear in the log, and is for example purposes only.  
The progress indicator codes are listed from top (latest) to bottom (oldest).  
LCD Progress Indicator Log  
B0FF  
0539..17  
0538..17  
0539..17  
0538..17  
0539..17  
0581  
0538..17  
0539..12  
0538..12  
0539..  
0821..01-K1-00  
0539..  
0728..01-R1-00-00  
0539..  
0664..40-60-00-1,0  
0539..  
0777..U1.5-P1-I14/E1  
0539..  
0742..U1.5-P1-I12/E1  
0539..  
0776..U1.5-P1-I10/T1  
E139  
E1FB  
E139  
E183  
Press Return to continue, or ’x’ to return to menu. >  
EAA1..U1.9-P1-I14  
E172..U1.9-P1  
E172..U1.9-P1-I14  
E172..U1.9-P1  
94BB  
9109  
9380  
9108  
9107  
9106  
9105  
9118  
9104  
9103  
9102  
90FD  
Resetting the Service Processor  
Some error conditions might cause the service processor to hang. The service  
processor must be reset to recover from a hung condition. If the system is powered on,  
resetting the service processor will cause the system to shut down. When the service  
processor is reset, it carries out its power-on sequence, including self-tests. Successful  
completion of the reset sequence is indicated by OK in the operator panel in the media  
drawer.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Before resetting the service processor, if the managed system is powered on and  
running AIX, shut down all partitions, or the full system partition. This action causes the  
system to shut down and the system power is turned off.  
To reset the service processor when the managed system is powered off, perform either  
of the following:  
v
If the service processor is responding to input from the HMC (or ASCII terminal),  
select Service Processor Setup Menu from the main menu, then select Reset  
Service Processor. This can only be done by a privileged user.  
v
Put the UEPO switch in the off position, then back to the on position.  
Note: Do not use the pinhole reset switch to reset the service processor.  
62 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Service Processor Operational Phases  
This section provides a high-level flow of the phases of the service processor.  
SP Power Applied  
Pre-Standby Phase  
Standby Phase SP Menus Available  
Bring-Up Phase SMS Menus Available  
Run-time Phase AIX Login Prompt Available  
Pre-Standby Phase  
This phase is entered when the server is connected to a power source. The server may  
or may not be fully powered on. This phase is exited when the power-on self-tests  
(POSTs) and configurations tasks are completed.  
The pre-standby phase components are:  
v
v
v
Service Processor Initialization - service processor performs any necessary hardware  
and software initialization.  
Service Processor POST - service processor conducts power-on self-tests on its  
various work and code areas.  
Service Processor Unattended Start Mode Checks - To assist fault recovery. If  
unattended start mode is set, the service processor automatically reboots the server.  
The service processor does not wait for user input or power-on command, but moves  
through the phase and into the bring-up phase. Access the SMS menus or the  
service processor menus to reset the unattended start mode.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Standby Phase  
The standby phase can be reached in either of two ways:  
v
With the server off and power connected (the normal path), recognized by OK in the  
LCD display.  
OR  
v
With the server on after an operating system fault, recognized by an 8-digit code in  
the LCD display.  
In the standby phase, the service processor takes care of some automatic duties and is  
available for menus operation. The service processor remains in the standby phase  
until a power-on request is detected.  
The standby phase components are as follows:  
v
Modem Configuration  
The service processor configures the modem (if installed) so that incoming calls can  
be received, or outgoing calls can be placed.  
v
Dial In  
Monitor incoming phone line to answer calls, prompt for a password, verify the  
password, and remotely display the standby menu. The remote session can be  
mirrored on the local HMC virtual terminal window if the server is so equipped and if  
the user enables this function.  
v
Menus  
The service processor menus are password-protected. Before you can access them,  
you need either the general user-password or privileged-user password.  
Service processor menus are available on ASCII terminals attached to the serial  
ports on the primary I/O book, and on terminal emulators. On HMC-managed  
systems, service processor menus are also available on the HMC graphical user  
interface.  
Bring-Up Phase  
On a system that is powered-on to full system partition, this phase is entered upon  
power-on, and exited upon loading of the operating system.  
On a system that is powered-on to partition standby, this phase is entered upon  
power-on, and exited when the partition manager and hypervisor have been loaded and  
become fully operational in system memory. The end of this phase is indicated when  
LPAR displays on the operator panel. At this point, the server can start multiple logical  
partitions which would be activated through the HMC graphical user interface.  
The bring-up phase components are as follows:  
v
Retry Request Check  
The service processor checks to see if the previous boot attempt failed. If the  
specified number of failures are detected, the service processor displays an error  
code and places an outgoing call to notify an external party if the user has enabled  
this option.  
v
Dial Out  
64 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The service processor can dial a preprogrammed telephone number in the event of  
an IPL failure. The service processor issues an error report with the last reported IPL  
status indicated and any other available error information.  
v
Update Operator Panel  
The service processor displays operator panel data on the HMC virtual terminal  
window if a remote connection is active.  
v
v
Environmental Monitoring  
The service processor provides expanded error recording and reporting.  
System Firmware Surveillance (Heartbeat Monitoring)  
The service processor monitors and times the interval between system firmware  
heartbeats.  
v
Responding to System Processor Commands  
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.  
Run-Time Phase  
This phase includes the tasks that the service processor performs during steady-state  
execution of the operating system.  
v
Environmental Monitoring  
The service processor monitors voltages, temperatures, and fan speeds (on some  
servers).  
v
v
Responding to System Processor Commands  
The service processor responds to any command issued by the system processor.  
Run-Time Surveillance (not supported on partitioned systems)  
If the device driver is installed and surveillance enabled, the service processor  
monitors the system heartbeat. If the heartbeat times out, the service processor  
places an outgoing call. This is different from the bring-up phase scenario, where the  
specified number of reboot attempts are made before placing an outgoing call.  
v
HMC surveillance  
On an HMC-managed system, the service processor monitors the communication link  
between the managed system and the HMC. If the service processor detects that this  
communication link has been broken, it will post an error to the operating system  
running on the managed system.  
Chapter 3. Using the Service Processor 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
66 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services  
Use the system management services menus to view information about your system or  
partition, and to perform tasks such as setting a password, changing the boot list, and  
setting the network parameters.  
To start the text-based System Management Services, press the number 1 key on the  
terminal or in the virtual terminal window on the HMC after the word keyboard appears  
and before the word speaker appears. After the text-based System Management  
Services starts, the following screen displays.  
Main Menu  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Select Language  
Change Password Options (NOT available in LPAR mode)  
View Error Log  
Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load)  
Change SCSI Settings  
Select Console (NOT available in LPAR mode)  
Select Boot Options  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Note: The System Management Services menus can also be started using the Service  
Processor Boot Mode Menu. See page 31.  
On all menus except the Main Menu, there are several navigation keys:  
M
Return to the main menu.  
ESC  
X
Return to the previous menu.  
Exit the System Management Services and start the operating system.  
If X is entered, you are asked to confirm your choice to exit the SMS menus  
and start the operating system.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When there is more than one page of information to display, the following additional  
navigation keys display:  
N
P
Display the next page of the list.  
Display the next page of the list.  
Note: The lowercase navigation key has the same effect as the uppercase key that is  
shown on the screen. For example, either m or M takes you back to the main  
menu.  
On each menu screen, you can choose either a menu item and press Enter (if  
applicable), or select a navigation key.  
Select Language  
Note: Your TTY must support the ISO-8859 character set to properly display languages  
other than English.  
This option allows you to change the language used by the text-based System  
Management Services menus.  
SELECT LANGUAGE  
1. English  
2. Francais  
3. Deutsch  
4. Italiano  
5. Espanol  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
68 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Password Utilities  
Note: This option is disabled in partitioned systems.  
The Password Utilities menu enables you to select from password utilities.  
Password Utilities  
1 Set Privileged-Access Password  
2 Remove Privileged-Access Password  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Set Privileged-Access Password  
The privileged-access password protects against the unauthorized starting of the  
system programs.  
Note: If the privileged-access password has been enabled, you are asked for the  
privileged-access password at startup every time you boot your system.  
If you previously had set a privileged-access password and want to remove it, select  
Remove Privileged-Access Password.  
View Error Log  
Use this option to view or clear your system’s error log. A menu similar to the following  
displays when you select this option.  
Error Log  
Date  
Time  
12:13:22  
Error Code  
25A80011  
Location  
00-00  
Entry 1. 01/04/96  
Entry 2. no error logged  
1. Clear error log  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: The time stamp in this error log is coordinated universal time (UTC), which is  
also referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT). AIX error logs have more  
information available and can time stamp with your local time.  
70 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load)  
This option allows you to enable and set up the remote startup capability of your  
system unit. You must first specify the network parameters.  
Network Parameters  
1. IP Parameters  
2. Adapter Parameters  
3. Ping Test  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Selecting the IP Parameters option displays the following menu.  
IP Parameters  
1. Client IP Address  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
[000.000.000.000]  
[000.000.000.000]  
[000.000.000.000]  
[255.255.255.000]  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
To change IP (Internet Protocol) parameters, type the number of the parameters for  
which you want to change the value.  
Attention: If the client system and the server are on the same subnet, set the  
gateway IP address to [0.0.0.0].  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Adapter Parameters option allows you to view an adapter’s hardware  
address, as well as configure network adapters that require setup. A menu similar to the  
following displays.  
Device  
Slot  
Hardware Address  
1. 10/100 Ethernet Adapter  
2. 10/100 Ethernet Adapter  
3. High Speed Token-Ring Adapter  
4. Gigabit Ethernet PCI Adapter  
U1.9-P1-I4/E1  
U1.5-P2-I3/E1  
U1.5-P1-I3/T1  
U1.1-P2-I3/T1  
000629aca72d  
0020357A0530  
000629be04e1  
0004ac7c9ec7  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Entering adapter parameters on these screens will automatically update the parameters  
on the ping test screen.  
Selecting an adapter on this menu displays configuration menus for that adapter:  
10/100 Ethernet TP PCI Adapter  
1. Data Rate  
2. Full Duplex  
[Auto]  
[Yes]  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
72 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the Data Rate option allows you the change the media usedd by the Ethernet  
adapter:  
Data Rate  
1. 10 Mbps  
2. 100 Mbps  
3. Auto  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Selecting the Full Duplex option allows you to change how the Ethernet adapter  
communicates with the network:  
Full Duplex  
1. Yes  
2. No  
3. Auto  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
From the Network Parameters Menu, select Ping to test a connection to a remote  
system unit. After selecting the Ping option, you must choose which adapter  
communicates with the remote system.  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adapter Parameters  
Device  
Slot  
Hardware Address  
1. 10/100 Ethernet Adapter  
2. 10/100 Ethernet Adapter  
3. High Speed Token-Ring Adapter  
4. Gigabit Ethernet PCI Adapter  
U1.9-P1-I4/E1  
U1.5-P2-I3/E1  
U1.5-P1-I3/T1  
U1.1-P2-I3/T1  
000629aca72d  
0020357A0530  
000629be04e1  
0004ac7c9ec7  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
After selecting an adapter, you will be asked to set the parameters for the adapter; a  
menu similar to the following displays:  
Adapter Parameters  
10/100 Ethernet Adapter  
1. Data Rate  
2. Full Duplex  
[Auto]  
[Auto]  
3. Continue with Ping  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
74 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
After choosing which adapter to use to ping the remote system, and setting its  
parameters, you must provide the addresses needed to communicate with the remote  
system.  
Ping Test  
1. Client IP Address  
2. Server IP Address  
3. Gateway IP Address  
4. Subnet Mask  
[129.132.4.20]  
[129.132.4.10]  
[129.132.4.30]  
[255.255.255.0]  
5. Execute Ping Test  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
If changes to the adapter parameters must be made in this screen, entering those  
changes will not automatically update the Adapter Parameters screen. Go back to the  
adapter parameters menu to make any changes.  
Notes:  
1. After the ping test is initiated, it might take up to 60 seconds to return a result.  
2. When the ping test completes, the firmware stops and waits for a key to be pressed  
before continuing.  
Change SCSI Settings  
This option allow you to view and change the addresses of the SCSI controllers  
attached to your system.  
SCSI Utilities  
1. Hardware Spin Up Delay  
2. Change SCSI Id  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Select Console  
Note: This option is disabled in partitioned systems.  
The Select Console option allows the user to select the console to use to display the  
SMS menus. This selection is valid only for the SMS menus and does not affect the  
display used by the AIX operating system.  
Follow the instructions that display on the screen. The firmware automatically returns to  
the SMS main menu.  
Select Boot Options  
Use this menu to view and set various options regarding the installation devices and  
boot devices.  
1. Select Install or Boot a Device  
2. Select Boot Devices  
3. Multiboot Startup  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
The following options are explained as follows:  
1. Select Install or Boot a Device allows you to select a device to boot from or to  
install the operating system from. This selection is for the current boot only.  
2. Select Boot Devices allows you to set the boot list.  
3. Multiboot Startup toggles the multiboot startup flag, which controls whether the  
multiboot menu is invoked automatically on startup.  
76 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If Diskette is selected, the following menu is displayed:  
Select Device Type  
1. Diskette  
2. Tape  
3. CD/DVD  
4. IDE  
5. Hard Drive  
6. Network  
7. None  
8. List All Devices  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
If a device is selected that does not reside in the system, a menu with the following  
message displays:  
.---------------------------------------------------------.  
| THE SELECTED DEVICES WERE NOT DETECTED IN THE SYSTEM !  
| Press any key to continue.  
|
|
`---------------------------------------------------------’  
If Hard Drive is selected, the following menu displays:  
Select Hard Drive Type  
1. SCSI  
2. SSA  
3. SAN  
4. None  
5. List All Devices  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
If List All Devices is selected, a menu similar to the following displays, depending on  
the devices that are installed in the system:  
Select Device  
Device Current Device  
Number Position Name  
1.  
2.  
3.  
4.  
1
-
-
SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-A8,O)  
SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-A9,0)  
SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-Aa,0)  
None  
5. List all devices  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
The appropriate device can then be selected for this boot or installation.  
When a device is selected for installing the operating system, or to boot from, the  
Select Task menu allows you to get more information about the device, or to boot from  
that device in normal mode or service mode. The following is an example of this menu.  
Select Task  
SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-A8,0)  
1. Information  
2. Normal Mode Boot  
3. Service Mode Boot  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
If either Normal Mode Boot or Service Mode Boot is selected, the next screen  
requests confirmation. If you answer yes, the device will be booted in the appropriate  
mode. If you answer no, the firmware will return to the Select Task menu.  
78 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Select Boot Devices  
Select this option to view and change the customized boot list, which is the sequence of  
devices read at startup.  
Configure Boot Device Order  
1. Select 1st Boot Device  
2. Select 2nd Boot Device  
3. Select 3rd Boot Device  
4. Select 4th Boot Device  
5. Select 5th Boot Device  
6. Display Current Setting  
7. Restore Default Setting  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
When any of the Boot Device options are selected, the Select Device Type screen  
displays, which will be similar to the following.  
Select Device Type  
1. Diskette  
2. Tape  
3. CD/DVD  
4. IDE  
5. Hard Drive  
6. Network  
7. None  
8. List All Devices  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a device type is selected, Select Task menu displays, similar to the following:  
Select Task  
SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-A8,0)  
1. Information  
2. Set Boot Sequence: Configure as 1st Boot Device  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Selecting Information displays a menu similar to the following for a hard disk.  
Device Information  
/pci@3fffdf0a000/pci@2,4/scsi@1/sd@8,0  
:
(Integrated)  
(Bootable)  
DEVICE  
: SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (U1.9-P2/Z1-A8,0)  
NAME  
: sd  
DEVICE-TYPE  
: block  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
The Set Boot Sequence option allows you to set the location of the device in the boot  
list.  
80 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display Current Settings  
This option displays the current setting of the customized boot list. An example of this  
menu, with one device in the boot list, follows.  
Current Boot Sequence  
1. SCSI 18200 MB Harddisk (loc=U1.9-P2/Z1-A8,0)  
2. None  
3. None  
4. None  
5. None  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Restore Default Settings  
This option restores the boot list to the default boot list. The default boot list will vary,  
depending on the devices that are installed in the system.  
The default boot list is:  
1. Primary diskette drive (if installed)  
2. CD-ROM drive (if installed)  
3. Tape drive (in installed)  
4. Hard disk drive (if installed)  
5. Network adapter  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Navigation keys:  
M = return to main menu  
ESC key = return to previous screen  
X = eXit System Management Services  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Type the number of the menu item and press Enter or Select a Navigation key: _  
Chapter 4. Using System Management Services 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Multiboot Startup  
The Multiboot Startup option controls whether the multiboot menu is invoked  
automatically on startup.  
Exiting System Management Services  
After you have finished using the system management services, type x (for exit) at the  
Utilities menu to boot your system or partition. On all other screens, typing x returns  
you to the previous screen.  
82 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics  
The diagnostics consist of online diagnostics and standalone diagnostics.  
Attention: The AIX operating system must be installed in a partition in order to run  
online diagnostics on that partition. If the AIX operating system is not installed, use the  
standalone diagnostic procedures.  
Online diagnostics, when they are installed, reside with AIX in the file system. They can  
be booted:  
v
v
v
In single user mode (referred to as service mode)  
To run in maintenance mode (referred to as maintenance mode)  
To run concurrently with other applications (referred to as concurrent mode)  
Standalone diagnostics must be booted before they can be run. If booted, the  
diagnostics have no access to the AIX error log or the AIX configuration data.  
Online and Standalone Diagnostics Operating Considerations  
Note: When possible, run online diagnostics in service mode. Online diagnostics  
perform additional functions compared to standalone diagnostics. Running online  
diagnostics in service mode ensures that the error state of the system that has  
been captured in NVRAM is available for your use in analyzing the problem. The  
AIX error log and certain SMIT functions are only available when diagnostics are  
run from the disk drive.  
Consider the following items before using the diagnostics:  
v
Standalone diagnostics can run on systems configured for either a full (or single)  
system partition or a multiple partitioned system. When running in a partitioned  
system, the device from which you are booting standalone diagnostics must be made  
available to the partition dedicated to running standalone diagnostics. This may  
require moving the device from the partition that currently contains the boot device  
(for example, the CD-ROM or network adapter connected to the NIM server that has  
a standalone diagnostic image) to the partition used to run standalone diagnostics. If  
you move devices, reboot both partitions. For more information, see “Standalone  
Diagnostic Operation” on page 88.  
v
v
When diagnostics are installed, the device support for some devices might not get  
installed. If this is the case, that device does not display in the diagnostic test list  
when running disk-based diagnostics.  
When running diagnostics in a partitioned system, diagnostics will work only with the  
resources that were assigned to that partition. You must run diagnostics in the  
partition containing the resource that you want to test.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Identifying the Terminal Type to the Diagnostics  
When you run diagnostics, you must identify which type of terminal you are using. If the  
terminal type is not known when the FUNCTION SELECTION menu is displayed, the  
diagnostics do not allow you to continue until a terminal is selected from the DEFINE  
TERMINAL option menu.  
Undefined Terminal Types  
If you specify an undefined terminal type from the DEFINE TERMINAL option menu, the  
menu prompts the user to enter a valid terminal type. The menu redisplays until either a  
valid type is entered or you exit the DEFINE TERMINAL option.  
Resetting the Terminal  
If you enter a terminal type that is valid (according to the DEFINE TERMINAL option  
menu) but is not the correct type for the Hardware Management Console for pSeries  
(HMC) virtual terminal window being used, you may be unable to read the screen, use  
the function keys, or use the Enter key. Bypass these difficulties by pressing Ctrl-C to  
reset the terminal. The screen display that results from this reset depends on the mode  
in which the system is being run:  
v
v
Online Normal or Maintenance Mode - The command prompt displays.  
Standalone Mode or Online Service Mode - The terminal type is reset to dumb, the  
Diagnostic Operating Instruction panel displays, and you are required to go through  
the DEFINE TERMINAL process again.  
Running Online Diagnostics  
Consider the following when you run the online diagnostics from a server or a disk:  
v
The diagnostics cannot be loaded and run from a disk until the AIX operating system  
has been installed and configured.  
v
The diagnostics cannot be loaded on a system (client) from a server if that system is  
not set up to boot from a server over a network. When the system is set up to boot  
from a server, the diagnostics are run in the same manner as they are from disk.  
v
v
On full system partitions, if the diagnostics are loaded from disk or a server, you  
must shut down the AIX operating system before turning off the system unit to  
prevent possible damage to disk data. Do this in either of the following ways:  
–
If the diagnostics were loaded in standalone mode, press the F3 key until  
DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS displays. Then press the F3 key once again  
to shut down the AIX operating system.  
–
If the diagnostics were loaded in maintenance or concurrent mode, type the  
shutdown -F command.  
Under some conditions, the system might stop, with instructions displayed on  
attached displays and terminals. Follow the instructions to select a console display.  
84 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Online Diagnostics Modes of Operation  
Note: When running online diagnostics on a partition in a partitioned system,  
diagnostics can be run only on resources that are allocated to that partition.  
The online diagnostics can be run in the following modes:  
v
v
v
Service Mode  
Concurrent Mode  
Maintenance Mode  
Service Mode  
Service mode provides the most complete checkout of the system resources. This  
mode also requires that no other programs be running on the partition or system on a  
full system partition. All partition or system on a full system partition resources, except  
the SCSI adapter and the disk drives used for paging, can be tested. However, note  
that the memory and processor are only tested during POST, and the results of the  
POST tests are reported by diagnostics.  
Error-log analysis is done in service mode when you select the Problem Determination  
option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
Running Online Diagnostics in Service Mode  
To run the online diagnostics in service mode from the boot hard disk, do the following:  
1. From the HMC, select the Partition Manager.  
2. Right-click on the mouse and select Open Terminal Window.  
3. From the Service Processor Menu on the VTERM, select Option 2 System Power  
Control.  
4. Select option 6. Verify that the state changes to currently disabled. Disabling  
fast system boot automatically enables slow boot.  
5. Select Option 98 to exit the system power control menu.  
6. Use the HMC to power on the managed system in a full system partition by  
selecting the managed system in the Contents area.  
7. Right-click or select the desired system in the Contents area. Next, on the menu,  
choose Selected.  
8. Select Power On.  
9. Select the Power on Diagnostic Stored Boot list option see the IBM Hardware  
Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide, order number  
SA38-0590, for more information about full system partitions).  
10. Make sure that there are no media in the devices in the media subsystem.  
11. Enter any passwords, if requested.  
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Note: If you are unable to load the diagnostics to the point when the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, go to “Step 2.5 Loading the Standalone  
Diagnostics from CD-ROM” on page 142.  
Concurrent Mode  
Use concurrent mode to run online diagnostics on some of the system resources while  
the system is running normal activity.  
Because the system is running in normal operation, the following resources cannot be  
tested in concurrent mode:  
v
v
v
v
v
SCSI adapters connected to paging devices  
Disk drive used for paging  
Some display adapters and graphics related devices  
Memory (tested during POST)  
Processor (tested during POST)  
The following levels of testing exist in concurrent mode:  
v
v
v
The share-test level tests a resource while the resource is being shared by  
programs running in the normal operation. This testing is mostly limited to normal  
commands that test for the presence of a device or adapter.  
The sub-test level tests a portion of a resource while the remaining part of the  
resource is being used in normal operation. For example, this test could test one port  
of a multiport device while the other ports are being used in normal operation.  
The full-test level requires the device not be assigned to or used by any other  
operation. This level of testing on a disk drive might require the use of the varyoff  
command. The diagnostics display menus to allow you to vary off the needed  
resource.  
Error-log analysis is done in concurrent mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
To run the online diagnostics in concurrent mode, you must be logged in to the AIX  
operating system and have proper authority to issue the commands (if help is needed,  
see the system operator).  
The diag command loads the diagnostic controller and displays the online diagnostic  
menus.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Concurrent Mode  
To run online diagnostics in concurrent mode, do the following:  
1. Log in to the AIX operating system as root user or use CE Login.  
2. Enter the diag command.  
3. When the DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, follow the  
instructions to check out the desired resources.  
86 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS. Press the F3 key again to return to the AIX  
operating system prompt. Be sure to vary on any resource that you had varied to  
off.  
5. Press Ctrl-D to log off from root user or CE Login.  
Maintenance Mode  
Maintenance mode runs the online diagnostics using the customer’s version of the AIX  
operating system. This mode requires that all activity on the partition running the AIX  
operating system be stopped so that the online diagnostics have most of the resources  
available to check. All of the system resources, except the SCSI adapters, memory,  
processor, and the disk drive used for paging, can be checked.  
Error log analysis is done in maintenance mode when you select the Problem  
Determination option on the DIAGNOSTIC MODE SELECTION menu.  
Use the shutdown -m command to stop all activity on the AIX operating system and  
put the AIX operating system into maintenance mode. The diag command is then used  
to invoke the diagnostic controller so you can run the diagnostics. After the diagnostic  
controller is loaded, follow the normal diagnostic instructions.  
Documentation for the AIX operating system is available from the IBM Eserver pSeries  
Information Center at http://publib16.boulder.ibm.com/pseries/en_US/infocenter/base.  
Select AIX documentation. The AIX Documentation CD contains the base set of  
publications for the operating system, including system-management and end-user  
documentation.  
Running the Online Diagnostics in Maintenance Mode  
To run the online diagnostics in maintenance mode, do the following:  
1. Stop all programs running on the partition except the AIX operating system (if help  
is needed, see the system operator).  
2. Log in to the AIX operating system as root user or use CE Login.  
3. Type the shutdown -m command.  
4. When a message indicates the system is in maintenance mode, enter the diag  
command.  
Note: It might be necessary to set TERM type again.  
5. When DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS screen displays, follow the  
displayed instructions to check out the desired resources.  
6. When testing is complete, use the F3 key to return to DIAGNOSTIC OPERATING  
INSTRUCTIONS. Press the F3 key again to return to the AIX operating system  
prompt.  
7. Press Ctrl-D to log off from root user or CE Login.  
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Standalone Diagnostic Operation  
Use standalone diagnostics to test the system when the online diagnostics are not  
installed and as a method of testing the disk drives that cannot be tested by the online  
diagnostics.  
Note: No error log analysis is done by the standalone diagnostics. The CD-ROM drive  
and the SCSI controller that controls it cannot be tested by the standalone  
diagnostics. Standalone diagnostics:  
v
v
Are resident on CD-ROM or a Network Installation Management (NIM) server  
Provide a method to test the system when the online diagnostics are not  
installed or cannot be loaded from the disk drive  
v
Allow testing of the disk drives and other resources that cannot be tested by  
the online diagnostics  
v
v
v
Do not have access to the AIX configuration data  
Do not have access to the AIX error log  
Do not allow for running of error log analysis  
Performing Slow Boot  
To fully analyze all of the available information, perform the following steps before doing  
a hardware repair or replacement:  
1. Record the 8-character error code (and location code if present) in the operator  
panel or that was reported by the customer.  
2. Do a slow-mode boot in service mode. This boot can be specified using the System  
Power Control Menu on the service processor main menu. (A fast-mode boot skips  
much of the built-in diagnostic testing.) A slow-mode boot may yield a new  
8-character error code on the operator panel and new errors in the service  
processor error log. If a new error code is reported, use this code to continue  
problem analysis.  
Partitioned System Considerations for Standalone Diagnostics  
To run standalone diagnostics on a full system partition, you must reboot the entire  
system. However, for a partition in a partitioned system, you can boot standalone  
diagnostics either in a given partition or on the entire system (which is the same  
procedure as a full system partition). For a partitioned system, before running  
standalone diagnostics on a given partition, the user must move the device from the  
existing location where standalone diagnostics is booted (the CD-ROM drive or the  
network adapter connected to the NIM server, in the case of NIM boot of standalone  
diagnostics), to the partition that will run standalone diagnostics. Devices on a  
partitioned system are moved on an I/O-slot basis.  
If the CD-ROM drive is moved from one partition to another, all SCSI devices on the  
same SCSI adapter card to which the CD-ROM drive is attached must be moved to the  
same partition. It is recommended that you attach few SCSI devices to the same SCSI  
controller card to prevent moving them, along with the CD-ROM drive, between  
88 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
partitions. A reboot is required on the partition containing this device and on the moved  
device, but the system itself is not powered off in order to boot standalone diagnostics  
in a logically partitioned system..  
Considerations for Running Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM  
Consider the following when you run standalone diagnostics:  
v
The diagnostic CD must remain in the CD-ROM drive for the entire time that  
diagnostics are running.  
v
The diagnostic CD cannot be ejected from the CD-ROM drive after the diagnostics  
have loaded. The CD can only be ejected after the system has been turned off and  
then turned on (standalone mode) or after the diagnostics program has terminated  
(online concurrent mode).  
v
v
The CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics were loaded cannot be tested.  
The SCSI adapter (or circuitry) controlling the CD-ROM drive from which diagnostics  
were loaded cannot be tested.  
Loading the Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM  
To run standalone diagnostics in service mode from CD-ROM, do the following:  
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.  
3. Power off the pSeries 690 (see the IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries  
Installation and Operations Guide, order number SA38-0590, for more information  
about full system partitions).  
4. Right-click the mouse and select Open Terminal Window.  
5. From the service processor menu on the VTERM, select option 2, System Power  
Control Menu.  
6. Select option 6. Verify that the state changes to currently disabled. Disabling fast  
system boot automatically enables slow boot.  
7. Select option 98 to exit the system power control menu.  
8. Use the HMC to power on the managed server in a full system partition. Select the  
Power on Diagnostic Default Boot List.  
9. Insert the CD-ROM into the CD-ROM drive in the media subsystem in the pSeries  
690 (not into the HMC’s CD-ROM drive).  
Running Standalone Diagnostics from a Network Installation Management (NIM)  
Server  
A client system connected to a network with a Network Installation Management (NIM)  
server can boot standalone diagnostics from the NIM server if the client-specific settings  
on both the NIM server and client are correct.  
Notes:  
1. All operations to configure the NIM server require root user authority.  
2. If you replace the network adapter in the client, the network adapter hardware  
address settings for the client must be updated on the NIM server.  
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. The Cstate for each standalone diagnostics client on the NIM server should be kept  
in the diagnostic boot has been enabled state.  
4. On the client system, the NIM server network adapter should be put in the bootlist  
after the boot disk drive. This allows the system to boot in standalone diagnostics  
from the NIM server if there is a problem booting from the disk drive. Refer to the  
Multiboot section under “SMS” in the client system’s service guide for information  
on setting the bootlist.  
NIM Server Configuration  
See the AIX Installation Guide and Reference, order number SC23-4389, for  
information on doing the following:  
v
v
Registering a client on the NIM server  
Enabling a client to run diagnostics from the NIM server  
To verify that the client system is registered on the NIM server and the diagnostic boot  
is enabled, run the command lsnim -a Cstate -Z ClientName from the command line  
on the NIM server. Refer to the following table for system responses.  
Note: The ClientName is the name of the system on which you want to run standalone  
diagnostics.  
System Response  
Client Status  
The client system is registered on the NIM  
server and enabled to run diagnostics from the  
NIM server.  
#name:Cstate:  
ClientName:diagnostic boot has been  
enabled:  
The client is registered on the NIM server but  
not enabled to run diagnostics from the NIM  
server.  
#name:Cstate:  
ClientName:ready for a NIM operation:  
Note: If the client system is registered on the  
NIM server but Cstate has not been set, no  
data will be returned.  
or  
#name:Cstate:  
ClientName:BOS installation has been  
enabled:  
The client is not registered on the NIM server.  
0042-053 lsnim: there is no NIM object  
named "ClientName"  
90 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Client Configuration and Booting Standalone Diagnostics from the NIM Server  
To run standalone diagnostics on a client from the NIM server, do the following:  
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. If you are running standalone diagnostics in a full system partition, verify with the  
system administrator and system users that the system unit can shut down. Stop all  
programs, including the AIX operating system. Refer to the AIX operating system  
documentation for shutdown command information.  
Verify with the system administrator and system users who are using that partition  
that all applications on that partition must be stopped, and that the partition will be  
rebooted. Stop all programs on that partition, including the operating system.  
3. If you are in a full system partition, power on the system unit to run standalone  
diagnostics. In a partitioned system, reboot the partition to run standalone  
diagnostics.  
4. When the keyboard indicator is displayed (the word keyboard on an HMC virtual  
terminal window), press the number 1 key on the keyboard to display the SMS  
menu.  
5. Enter any requested passwords.  
6. Select Setup Remote IPL (Initial Program Load).  
7. Enter the client address, server address, gateway address (if applicable), and  
subnet mask. Exit to the Network Parameters screen.  
8. If the NIM server is set up to allow pinging from the client system, use the ping  
utility in the RIPL utility to verify that the client system can ping the NIM server.  
Under the ping utility, choose the network adapter that provides the attachment to  
the NIM server to do the ping operation. If the ping returns with an OK prompt, the  
client is prepared to boot from the NIM server. If ping returns with a FAILED prompt,  
the client cannot proceed with the NIM boot.  
Note: If the ping fails, refer to the Boot Problems section of the Eserver pSeries  
670 Service Guide and follow the steps for network boot problems.  
To do a one-time boot of the network adapter attached to the NIM server network, do  
the following:  
1. Exit to the SMS Main screen.  
2. Select Select Boot Options.  
3. Select Install or Boot a Device.  
4. On the Select Device Type screen, select Network.  
5. Set the network parameters for the adapter from which you want to boot.  
6. Exit completely from SMS.  
The system starts loading packets while doing a bootp from the network.  
Follow the instructions on the screen to select the system console.  
v
If Diagnostics Operating Instructions Version x.x.x displays, standalone  
diagnostics have loaded successfully.  
v
If the AIX login prompt displays, standalone diagnostics did not load. Check the  
following items:  
Chapter 5. Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
–
–
–
The network parameters on the client may be incorrect.  
Cstate on the NIM server may be incorrect.  
Network problems might be preventing you from connecting to the NIM server.  
Verify the settings and the status of the network. If you continue to have problems, refer  
to the Boot Problems section of the Eserver pSeries 670 Service Guide and follow the  
steps for network boot problems.  
92 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids  
The AIX Diagnostic Package contains programs that are called Tasks. Tasks can be  
thought of as performing a specific function on a resource; for example, running  
diagnostics or performing a service aid on a resource. This chapter describes the Tasks  
available in AIX Diagnostics Version 4.2 and later.  
Note: Many of these programs work on all system model architectures. Some  
programs are only accessible from Online Diagnostics in Service or Concurrent  
mode, while others might be accessible only from Standalone Diagnostics. Still  
other programs might only be supported on a particular system architecture,  
such as CHRP (Common Hardware Reference Platform) or RSPC (PowerPC  
Reference Platform).  
Note: If the system is running on a logically partitioned system, the following tasks may  
only be executed in a partition with service authority:  
v
v
v
v
v
Configure Reboot Policy  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy  
Update System or Service Processor Flash  
Configure Scan Dump Policy  
To perform one of these tasks, use the Task Selection option from the FUNCTION  
SELECTION menu.  
After a task is selected, a resource menu may be presented showing all resources  
supported by the task.  
A fast path method is also available to perform a task by using the diag command and  
the -T flag. By using the fast path, the user can bypass most of the introductory menus  
to access a particular task. The user is presented with a list of resources available to  
support the specified task. The fast path tasks are as follows:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Certify - Certifies media  
Chkspares - Checks for the availability of spare sectors  
Download - Downloads microcode to an adapter or device  
Disp_mcode - Displays current level of microcode  
Format - Formats media  
Identify - Identifies the PCI RAID physical disks  
IdentifyRemove - Identifies and removes devices (Hot Plug)  
To run these tasks directly from the command line, specify the resource and other  
task-unique flags. Use the descriptions in this chapter to understand which flags are  
needed for a given task.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Tasks  
The following tasks are described in this chapter:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
Add Resource to Resource List  
AIX Shell Prompt  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log  
Backup and Restore Media  
Certify Media  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data  
Configure Dials and LPF Keys  
Configure ISA Adapters  
Configure Reboot Policy  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy  
Configure Scan Dump Policy  
Configure Surveillance Policy  
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
Delete Resource from Resource List  
Disk Maintenance  
Display Configuration and Resource List  
Display Firmware Device Node Information  
Display Hardware Error Report  
Display Hardware Vital Product Data  
Display Machine Check Error Log  
Display Microcode Level  
Display or Change Bootlist  
Display or Change Diagnostic Run Time Options  
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
Display Resource Attributes  
Display Service Hints  
Display Software Product Data  
Display System Environmental Sensors  
Display Test Patterns  
Display USB Devices  
Download Microcode  
Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids  
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
Format Media  
Gather System Information  
Generic Microcode Download  
Hot Plug Task  
Local Area Network Analyzer  
Log Repair Action  
Periodic Diagnostics  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify  
Process Supplemental Media  
Run Diagnostics  
Run Error Log Analysis  
Run Exercisers  
SCSI Bus Analyzer  
94 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid  
Spare Sector Availability  
SSA Service Aid  
System Fault Indicator  
System Identify Indicator  
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics  
Update System or Service Processor Flash  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aids  
7318 Serial Communication Network Server  
Add Resource to Resource List  
Use this task to add resources back to the resource list.  
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and deleted  
from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are available to be  
added, then none are listed.  
AIX Shell Prompt  
Note: Use this service aid in Online Service Mode only.  
This service aid allows access to the AIX command line. To use this service aid, the  
user must know the root password (when a root password has been established).  
Note: Do not use this task to install code or to change the configuration of the system.  
This task is intended to view files, configuration records, and data. Using this  
service aid to change the system configuration or install code can produce  
unexplained system problems after exiting the diagnostics.  
Analyze Adapter Internal Log  
The PCI RAID adapter has an internal log that logs information about the adapter and  
the disk drives attached to the adapter. Whenever data is logged in the internal log, the  
device driver copies the entries to the AIX system error log and clears the internal log.  
The Analyze Adapter Internal Log service aid analyzes these entries in the AIX system  
error log. The service aid displays the errors and the associated service actions. Entries  
that do not require any service actions are ignored.  
When running this service aid, a menu is presented to enter the start time, the end  
time, and the file name. The start time and end time have the following format:  
[mmddHHMMyy]. (where mm is the month (1-12), dd is the date (1-31) HH is the hour  
(00-23) MM is the minute (00-59), and yy is the last two digits of the year (00-99). The  
file name is the location where the user wants to store the output data.  
To invoke the service aid task from the command line, type:  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
diag -c -d devicename -T "adapela [-s start date -e end date]  
Flag  
Description  
-c  
Specifies not console mode.  
-d devicename  
Specifies the device whose internal log you  
want to analyze (for example, SCRAID0)  
-s start date  
-e end date  
Specifies all errors after this date are analyzed.  
Specifies all errors before this date are  
analyzed.  
-T  
Specifies the Analyze Adapter Internal Log task  
Note: To specify a file name from the command line, use the redirection operator at the  
end of the command to specify where the output of the command is to be sent,  
for example > filename (where filename is the name and location where the  
user wants to store the output data (for example, /tmp/adaptlog).  
Backup and Restore Media  
This service aid allows verification of backup media and devices. It presents a menu of  
tape and diskette devices available for testing and prompts for selecting the desired  
device. It then presents a menu of available backup formats and prompts for selecting  
the desired format. The supported formats are tar, backup, and cpio. After the device  
and format are selected, the service aid backs up a known file to the selected device,  
restores that file to /tmp, and compares the original file to the restored file. The restored  
file remains in /tmp to allow for visual comparison. All errors are reported.  
96 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Certify Media  
This task allows the selection of diskette, DVD-RAM media or hard files to be certified.  
Normally, this is done for the following two conditions:  
v
v
To determine the condition of the drive and media.  
To verify that the media is error free after a Format Service Aid has been run on the  
media.  
Normally, one would run certify if after running diagnostics on a drive and its media, no  
problem is found, but one still suspects that a problem still does exist.  
Hard files can be connected either to a SCSI adapter (non-RAID) or a PCI SCSI RAID  
adapter. The usage and criteria for a hard file connected to a non-RAID SCSI adapter  
are different from those for a hard file connected to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.  
Certify may be used in the following ways:  
v
Certify Diskette  
This selection enables you to verify the data written on a diskette. When you select  
this service aid, a menu asks you to select the type of diskette being verified. The  
program then reads all of the ID and data fields on the diskette one time and  
displays the total number of bad sectors found.  
v
Certify DVD-RAM media  
This selection reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts  
all errors encountered. If an unrecovered error occurs, or recovered errors exceed  
the threshold value, the data on the media should be transferred to other media and  
the original media should be discarded.  
The Certify service aid will display the following information:  
–
–
–
–
Capacity in bytes  
Number of Data Errors Not Recovered  
Number of Equipment Check Errors  
Number of Recovered Errors  
If the drive is reset during a certify operation, the operation is restarted.  
If the drive is reset again, the certify operation is terminated and the user is asked to  
run diagnostics on the drive.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d -T certify  
Flag  
-c  
-d  
Description  
No console mode  
Specifies a device  
Specifies the certify task  
-T  
v
Certify Hardfile Attached to a Non-RAID SCSI Adapter  
This selection reads all of the ID and data fields. It checks for bad data and counts  
all errors encountered. If there are unrecovered data errors that do not exceed the  
threshold value, then the hard file needs to be formatted and certified. If the  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
unrecovered data errors, recovered data errors, recovered and unrecovered  
equipment errors exceed the threshold values, the disk needs to be replaced.  
It also makes 2000 random seeks after the read certify of the surface completes. If a  
disk timeouts before finishing the random seeks, then the disk needs to be replaced.  
The random seeks also count all errors encountered.  
The Certify service aid will display the following information:  
–
–
–
–
–
Drive capacity in megabytes.  
Number of Data Errors Recovered.  
Number of Data Errors Not Recovered.  
Number of Equipment Checks Recovered.  
Number of Equipment Checks Not Recovered.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify"  
Flag  
-c  
-d  
Description  
No console mode  
Specifies a device  
Specifies the certify task  
-T  
v
Format and/or Erase Hardfile Attached to a Non-RAID SCSI Adapter  
Attention: The following commands WILL change the content of the hardfile. Be  
sure to backup data prior to running the command, and take care in choosing the  
hardfile upon which you run this task.  
–
Hardfile Format  
Writes all of the disk. The pattern written on the disk is device-dependant; for  
example, some drives may write all 0s, while some may write the hexadecimal  
number 5F. No bad block reassignment occurs.  
–
–
Hardfile Format and Certify  
Performs the same function as Hardfile Format. After the format is completed,  
Certify is run. Certify then reassigns all bad blocks encountered.  
Hardfile Erase Disk  
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in  
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more  
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be  
read and displayed on the system console.  
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written.  
The patterns are written serially; that is, the first pattern is written to all blocks.  
Then the next pattern is written to all blocks, overlaying the previous pattern. A  
random pattern is written by selecting the Write Random Pattern option.  
Note: The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the  
Department of Defense or any other organization’s security guidelines.  
Use the following steps to overwrite the data on the drive:  
1. Use the Erase Disk selection to overwrite the data on the drive.  
98 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Do a format without certify.  
3. Run a second pass of the Erase Disk selection.  
For a newly installed drive, you can ensure that all blocks on the drive are  
overwritten with your pattern if you use the following procedure:  
1. Format the drive.  
2. Check the defect MAP by running the Erase Disk selection.  
Note: If you use Format and Certify option, there may be some blocks which  
get placed into the grown defect MAP.  
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect MAP, record the information presented  
and ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used later  
when the drive is to be overwritten.  
4. Use you drive as you would normally.  
5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same version  
of the Erase Disk selection which was used in step 2.  
Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if any bad  
blocks were found in step 3.  
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded for the drive in step 3 with  
those that now appear in the grown defect MAP.  
Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly obtained  
data, then all sectors on this drive cannot be overwritten. The new bad  
blocks are not overwritten.  
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite  
the disk with the chosen pattern(s).  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the command  
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s* fmtcert | erase -a {read |  
write}] [-F]*  
Flag  
Description  
fmtcert Formats and certifies the disk.  
erase Overwrites the data on the disk.  
*
Available in no-console mode only.  
-F  
Force the disk erasure even if all blocks cannot be erased due to errors  
accessing the grown defect map.  
Note: The Erase Disk option in command line mode uses default values. To  
selectively read or write, use the diag command in console mode.  
v
Certify Hardfile attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
This selection is used to certify physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter.  
Certify reads the entire disk and checks for recovered errors, unrecovered errors,  
and reassigned errors. If these errors exceed the threshold values, the user is  
prompted to replace the physical disk.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "certify {-l chID | -A}"  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
No console mode  
-d  
-T  
-I  
-A  
Specifies the RAID adapter to which the disk is attached  
Specifies the certify task and its parameters  
Specifies physical Disk channel/ID (example: -l 27)  
All disks  
Change Hardware Vital Product Data  
Use this service aid to display the Display/Alter VPD Selection Menu. The menu lists all  
resources installed on the system. When a resource is selected, a menu displays that  
lists all the VPD for that resource.  
Note: The user cannot alter the VPD for a specific resource unless it is not  
machine-readable.  
Configure Dials and LPF Keys  
Note: The Dials and LPF Keys service aid is not supported in standalone mode  
(CD-ROM and NIM) on systems with 32 MB or less memory. If you have  
problems in standalone mode, use the hardfile-based diagnostics.  
This service aid provides a tool for configuring and removing dials and LPF keys to the  
asynchronous serial ports.  
This selection invokes the SMIT utility to allow Dials and LPF keys configuration. A TTY  
must be in the available state on the async port before the Dials and LPF keys can be  
configured on the port. The task allows an async adapter to be configured, then a TTY  
port defined on the adapter. Dials and LPF keys can then be defined on the port.  
Before configuring Dials or LPF keys on a serial port, you must remove all defined  
TTYs. To determine if there are any defined TTYs, select List All Defined TTYs. Once  
all defined TTYs have been removed, then add a new TTY and configure the Dials or  
LPF keys.  
Configure ISA Adapter  
This task uses SMIT to identify and configure ISA adapters on systems that have an  
ISA bus and adapters.  
Diagnostic support for ISA adapters not shown in the list may be supported from a  
supplemental diskette. You can use the Process Supplemental Media task to add ISA  
adapter support from a supplemental diskette.  
100 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Whenever an ISA adapter is installed, this service aid must be run and the adapter  
configured before the adapter can be tested. You must also run this service aid to  
remove an ISA adapter from the system whenever an ISA adapter is physically  
removed from the system.  
If diagnostics are run on an ISA adapter that has been removed from the system, the  
diagnostics fail because the system cannot detect the ISA adapter.  
Configure Reboot Policy  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This service aid controls how the system tries to recover from a system crash.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Reboot Policy.  
Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be  
displayed by this service aid.  
v
Maximum Number of Reboot Attempts  
Enter a number that is 0 or greater.  
Note: A value of 0 indicates ’do not attempt to reboot’ to a crashed system.  
This number is the maximum number of consecutive attempts to reboot the system.  
The term reboot, in the context of this service aid, is used to describe bringing  
system hardware back up from scratch; for example, from a system reset or  
power-on.  
When the reboot process completes successfully, the reboot attempts count is reset  
to 0, and a restart begins. The term restart, in the context of this service aid, is used  
to describe the operating system activation process. Restart always follows a  
successful reboot.  
When a restart fails, and a restart policy is enabled, the system attempts to reboot  
for the maximum number of attempts.  
v
v
Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to Yes, the system attempts to  
reboot from a crash if the operating system has an enabled Defined Restart or  
Reboot Policy.  
When ’Use the O/S Defined Restart Policy’ is set to No, or the operating system  
restart policy is undefined, then the restart policy is determined by the ’Supplemental  
Restart Policy’.  
Enable Supplemental Restart Policy (1=Yes, 0=No)  
The ’Supplemental Restart Policy’, if enabled, is used when the O/S Defined Restart  
Policy is undefined, or is set to False.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When surveillance detects operating system inactivity during restart, an enabled  
’Supplemental Restart Policy’ causes a system reset and the reboot process begins.  
v
v
Call-Out Before Restart (on/off)  
When enabled, Call-Out Before Restart allows the system to call out (on a serial port  
that is enabled for call-out) when an operating system restart is initiated. Such calls  
can be valuable if the number of these events becomes excessive, thus signalling  
bigger problems.  
Enable Unattended Start Mode (1=Yes, 0=No)  
When enabled, ’Unattended Start Mode’ allows the system to recover from the loss  
of ac power.  
If the system was powered-on when the ac loss occurred, the system reboots when  
power is restored. If the system was powered-off when the ac loss occurred, the  
system remains off when power is restored.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -b  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
The Remote Maintenance Policy includes modem configurations and phone numbers to  
use for remote maintenance support.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Remote  
Maintenance Policy.  
Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be  
displayed by this service aid.  
v
v
Configuration File for Modem on serial port 1 (S1) Configuration File for Modem on  
serial port 2 (S2).  
Enter the name of a modem configuration file to load on either S1 or S2. The modem  
configuration files are located in the directory /usr/share/modems. If a modem file is  
already loaded, it is indicated by Modem file currently loaded.  
Modem file currently loaded on S1 Modem file currently loaded on S2  
This is the name of the file that is currently loaded on serial port 1 or serial port 2.  
Note: These settings are only shown when a modem file is loaded for a serial port.  
Call In Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call In Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
Call In allows the Service Processor to receive a call from a remote terminal.  
Call Out Authorized on S1 (on/off) Call Out Authorized on S2 (on/off)  
Call Out allows the Service Processor to place calls for maintenance.  
S1 Line Speed S2 Line Speed  
v
v
v
A list of line speeds is available by using List on the screen.  
102 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Service Center Phone Number  
This is the number of the service center computer. The service center usually  
includes a computer that takes calls from systems with call-out capability. This  
computer is referred to as ″the catcher.″ The catcher expects messages in a specific  
format to which the Service Processor conforms. For more information about the  
format and catcher computers, refer to the README file in the AIX  
/usr/samples/syscatch directory. Contact the service provider for the correct  
telephone number to enter here.  
Customer Administration Center Phone Number  
This is the number of the System Administration Center computer (catcher) that  
receives problem calls from systems. Contact the system administrator for the correct  
telephone number to enter here.  
v
v
Digital Pager Phone Number In Event of Emergency  
This is the number for a pager carried by someone who responds to problem calls  
from your system.  
Customer Voice Phone Number  
This is the number for a telephone near the system, or answered by someone  
responsible for the system. This is the telephone number left on the pager for  
callback.  
v
Customer System Phone Number  
This is the number to which your system’s modem is connected. The service or  
administration center representatives need this number to make direct contact with  
your system for problem investigation. This is also referred to as the Call In phone  
number.  
v
v
Customer Account Number  
This number is available for service providers to use for record-keeping and billing.  
Call Out Policy Numbers to call if failure  
This is set to either First or All. If the call-out policy is set to First, call out stops at  
the first successful call to one of the following numbers in the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
If Call Out Policy is set to All, call-out attempts to call all of the following numbers in  
the order listed:  
1. Service Center  
2. Customer Administration Center  
3. Pager  
v
v
v
Customer RETAIN Login ID Customer RETAIN Login Password  
These settings apply to the RETAIN service function.  
Remote Timeout, in seconds Remote Latency, in seconds  
These settings are functions of the service provider’s catcher computer.  
Number of Retries While Busy  
This is the number of times the system should retry calls that resulted in busy  
signals.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
v
System Name (System Administrator Aid)  
This is the name given to the system and is used when reporting problem messages.  
Note: Knowing the system name aids the support team in quickly identifying the  
location, configuration, history, and so on of your system.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -m  
Configure Ring Indicate Power-On Policy  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This service aid allows the user to power-on a system by telephone from a remote  
location. If the system is powered off, and Ring Indicate Power On is enabled, the  
system powers on at a predetermined number of rings. If the system is already on, no  
action is taken. In either case, the telephone call is not answered, and the caller  
receives no feedback that the system has powered on.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Ring Indicate  
Power-On Policy:  
Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be  
displayed by this service aid.  
v
v
Power On Via Ring Indicate (on/off)  
Number of Rings Before Power On  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -r  
104 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configure Scan Dump Policy  
Note: This function works only on CHRP systems and only under diagnostics 5.1.0.35  
or later.  
Configure Scan Dump Policy allows the user to set or view the scan dump policy (scan  
dump control and size) in NVRAM. Scan Dump data is a set of chip data that the  
service processor gathers after a system malfunction. It consists of chip scan rings, chip  
trace arrays, and Scan COM (SCOM) registers. This data is stored in the scan-log  
partition of the system’s Nonvolatile Random Access Memory (NVRAM).  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Scan Dump  
Policy at run time:  
v
Scan Dump Control (how often the dump is taken)  
and  
v
Scan Dump Size (size and content of the dump)  
The Scan Dump Control (SDC) settings are:  
v
As Needed: This setting allows the platform firmware to determine whether a scan  
dump is performed. This is the default setting for the dump policy.  
v
Always: This setting overrides the firmware recommendations and always performs a  
dump after a system failure.  
The Scan Dump Size (SDS) settings are:  
v
v
As Requested - Dump content is determined by the platform firmware.  
Minimum - Dump content collected provides the minimum debug information. The  
intent is to allow the platform to reboot as quickly as possible.  
v
v
Optimum - Dump content collected provides a moderate amount of debug  
information.  
Complete - Dump data provides the most complete error coverage at the expense of  
reboot speed.  
You can access this task directly from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -d  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configure Surveillance Policy  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only. This service aid is only  
supported for systems running in full machine partition.  
This service aid monitors the system for hang conditions; that is, hardware or software  
failures that cause operating system inactivity. When enabled, and surveillance detects  
operating system inactivity, a call is placed to report the failure.  
Use this service aid to display and change the following settings for the Surveillance  
Policy:  
Note: Because of system capability, some of the following settings might not be  
displayed by this service aid:  
v
v
Surveillance (on/off)  
Surveillance Time Interval  
This is the maximum time between heartbeats from the operating system.  
Surveillance Time Delay  
v
v
This is the time to delay between when the operating system is in control and when  
to begin operating system surveillance.  
Changes are to Take Effect Immediately  
Set this to Yes if the changes made to the settings in this menu are to take place  
immediately. Otherwise the changes take effect beginning with the next system boot.  
You can access this service aid directly from the AIX command line, by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uspchrp -s  
Create Customized Configuration Diskette  
This selection invokes the Diagnostic Package Utility Service Aid, which allows the user  
to create a standalone diagnostic package configuration diskette.  
The Standalone Diagnostic Package Configuration Diskette allows the following to be  
changed from the console:  
v
Default refresh rate for a low function terminal (LFT)  
The refresh rate used by the standalone diagnostic package is 60 Hz. If the display’s  
refresh rate is 77 Hz, set the refresh rate to 77.  
v
Different async terminal console  
You can create a console configuration file that allows a terminal attached to any  
RS232 or RS422 adapter to be selected as a console device. The default device is  
an RS232 TTY device attached to the first standard serial port (S1).  
106 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delete Resource from Resource List  
Use this task to delete resources from the resource list.  
Note: Only resources that were previously detected by the diagnostics and have not  
been deleted from the Diagnostic Test List are listed. If no resources are  
available to be deleted, then none are listed.  
Disk Maintenance  
This service aid provides the following options for the fixed-disk maintenance:  
v
Disk to Disk Copy  
Display/Alter Sector  
v
Disk to Disk Copy  
Notes:  
1. This service aid cannot be used to update to a different size drive. The service aid  
only supports copying from a SCSI drive to another SCSI drive of similar size.  
2. Use the migratepv command when copying the contents to other disk drive types.  
This command also works when copying SCSI disk drives or when copying to a  
different size SCSI disk drive. Refer to System Management Guide: Operating  
System and Devices for a procedure on migrating the contents of a physical  
volume.  
This publication is located on the AIX V4.3 Documentation CD. The documentation  
information is made accessible by loading the documentation CD onto the hard disk  
or by mounting the CD in the CD-ROM drive.  
This selection allows you to recover data from an old drive when replacing it with a new  
drive. The service aid recovers all logical volume manager (LVM) software reassigned  
blocks. To prevent corrupted data from being copied to the new drive, the service aid  
stops if an unrecoverable read error is detected. To help prevent possible problems with  
the new drive, the service aid stops if the number of bad blocks being reassigned  
reaches a threshold.  
To use this service aid, both the old and new disks must be installed in or attached to  
the system with unique SCSI addresses. This requires that the new disk drive SCSI  
address must be set to an address that is not currently in use and the drive be installed  
in an empty location. If there are no empty locations, then one of the other drives must  
be removed. When the copy is complete, only one drive can remain installed. Either  
remove the target drive to return to the original configuration, or perform the following  
procedure to complete the replacement of the old drive with the new drive:  
1. Remove both drives.  
2. Set the SCSI address of the new drive to the SCSI address of the old drive.  
3. Install the new drive in the old drive’s location.  
4. Install any other drives (that were removed) into their original location.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To prevent problems that can occur when running this service aid from disk, it is  
suggested that this service aid be run, when possible, from the diagnostics that are  
loaded from removable media.  
Display/Alter Sector  
Note: Use caution when you use this service aid because inappropriate modification to  
some disk sectors can result in the total loss of all data on the disk.  
This selection allows the user to display and alter information on a disk sector. Sectors  
are addressed by their decimal sector number. Data is displayed both in hex and in  
ASCII. To prevent corrupted data from being incorrectly corrected, the service aid does  
not display information that cannot be read correctly.  
Display Configuration and Resource List  
If a device is not included in the Test List or if you think a Diagnostic Package for a  
device is not loaded, check by using the Display Configuration and Resource List task.  
If the device you want to test has a plus (+) sign or a minus (-) sign preceding its name,  
the Diagnostic Package is loaded. If the device has an asterisk (*) preceding its name,  
the Diagnostic Package for the device is not loaded or is not available.  
This service aid displays the item header only for all installed resources. Use this  
service aid when there is no need to see the vital product data (VPD). (No VPD is  
displayed.)  
Display Firmware Device Node Information  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This task displays the firmware device node information that appears on CHRP  
platforms. This service aid is intended to gather more information about individual or  
particular devices on the system. The format of the output data may differ depending on  
which level of the AIX operating system is installed.  
Display Hardware Error Report  
This service aid uses the errpt command to view the hardware error log.  
The Display Error Summary and Display Error Detail selection provide the same type of  
report as the errpt command. The Display Error Analysis Summary and Display Error  
Analysis Detail selection provide additional analysis.  
108 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Hardware Vital Product Data  
This service aid displays all installed resources, along with any VPD for those  
resources. Use this service aid when you want to look at the VPD for a specific  
resource.  
Display Machine Check Error Log  
Note: The Machine Check Error Log Service Aid is available only on Standalone  
Diagnostics.  
When a machine check occurs, information is collected and logged in an NVRAM error  
log before the system unit shuts down. This information is logged in the AIX error log  
and cleared from NVRAM when the system is rebooted from the hard disk, LAN, or  
standalone media. When booting from Standalone Diagnostics, this service aid converts  
the logged information into a readable format that can be used to isolate the problem.  
When booting from the hard disk or LAN, the information can be viewed from the AIX  
error log using the Hardware Error Report Service Aid. In either case, the information is  
analyzed when the sysplanar0 diagnostics are running in Problem Determination  
Mode.  
Display Microcode Level  
This task is used to display the microcode or firmware levels of currently installed  
resources. When the sys0 resource is selected, the task displays the levels of both the  
system firmware and service processor firmware. sys0 may not be available in all  
cases.  
You can display the current level of the microcode on an adapter, the system, or a  
device by using the AIX diag command. See the following command syntax: diag -c  
-d device -T "disp_mcode"  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
No console mode.  
-d  
-T  
Used to specify a device.  
Use the disp_mcode option to display microcode.  
The AIX lsmcode command serves as a command line interface to the ″Display  
Microcode Level″ task. For information on the lsmcode command, refer to the AIX  
Commands Reference manual.  
Display or Change Bootlist  
This service aid allows the bootlist to be displayed, altered, or erased.  
The system attempts to perform an IPL from the first device in the list. If the device is  
not a valid IPL device or if the IPL fails, the system proceeds in turn to the other  
devices in the list to attempt an IPL.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options  
The Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options task allows the diagnostic  
run-time options to be set.  
Note: The run-time options are used only when selecting the Run Diagnostic task.  
The run-time options are:  
v
Display Diagnostic Mode Selection Menus  
This option allows the user to turn on or off displaying the DIAGNOSTIC MODE  
SELECTION MENU (the default is on).  
v
Run Tests Multiple Times  
This option allows the user to turn on or off, or specify a loop count, for diagnostic  
loop mode (the default is off).  
Note: This option is only displayed when you run the Online Diagnostics in Service  
Mode.  
v
v
v
v
Include Advanced Diagnostics  
This option allows the user to turn on or off including the Advanced Diagnostics (the  
default is off).  
Include Error Log Analysis (not available in diagnostics 5.2.0 or later)  
This option allows the user to turn on or off including the Error Log Analysis (ELA)  
(the default is off).  
Include Error Log Analysis  
This option allows the user to turn on or off including the Error Log Analysis (ELA)  
(the default is off).  
Number of Days Used to Search Error Log  
This option allows the user to select the number of days for which to search the AIX  
error log for errors when running the Error Log Analysis. The default is seven days,  
but it can be changed from one to sixty days.  
v
Display Progress Indicators  
This option allows the user to turn on or off the progress indicators when running the  
Diagnostic Applications. The progress indicators are in a popup box at the bottom of  
the screen which indicate that the test being run (the default is on).  
v
v
Diagnostic Event Logging  
This option allows the user to turn on or off logging information to the Diagnostic  
Event Log (the default is on).  
Diagnostic Event Log File Size  
This option allows the user to select the maximum size of the Diagnostic Event Log.  
The default size for the Diagnostic Event Log is 100 KB. The size can be increased  
in 100 KB increments to a maximum of 1 MB.  
Use the diaggetrto command to display one or more diagnostic run-time options. Use  
the following AIX command line syntax:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/diaggetrto [-a] [-d] [-l] [-m] [-n] [-p] [-s]  
110 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the diagsetrto command to change one or more diagnostic run-time options. Use  
the following AIX command line syntax:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/diagsetrto [-a on/off] [-d on/off] [-l size]  
[-m on/off] [-n days] [-p on/off]  
Flag descriptions for diaggetrto and diagsetrto are as follows:  
Flag  
-a  
Description  
Displays or changes the value of the Include Advanced Diagnostics option.  
Displays or changes the value of the Diagnostic Event Logging option.  
-d  
-l  
Displays or changes the value of the Diagnostic Event Log File Size. Allowable  
size are between 100K and 1000K in increments of 100K. The size may never  
be decreased.  
-m  
-n  
Displays or changes the value of the Display Diagnostic Mode Selection Menu  
option.  
Displays or changes the value of the Number of Days Used To Search the  
Error Log option. Allowable values are between 1 and 60 days. 7 days is the  
default.  
-p  
-s  
Displays or changes the value of the Display Progress Indicators option.  
Displays all of the diagnostic run-time option.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Previous Diagnostic Results  
Note: This service aid is not available when you load the diagnostics from a source  
other than a hard disk drive or a network.  
This service aid allows a service representative to display results from a previous  
diagnostic session. When the Display Previous Diagnostic Results option is selected,  
the user can view up to 25 no trouble found (NTF) and service request number (SRN)  
results.  
This service aid displays Diagnostic Event Log information. You can display the  
Diagnostic Event Log in a short version or a long version. The Diagnostic Event Log  
contains information about events logged by a diagnostic session.  
This service aid displays the information in reverse chronological order. If more  
information is available than can be displayed on one screen, use the Page Down and  
Page Up keys to scroll through the information.  
This information is not from the AIX operating system error log. This information is  
stored in the /var/adm/ras directory.  
You can run the command from the AIX command line by typing:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/diagrpt [[-o] | [-s mmddyy] | [-a] | [-r]]  
Flag  
-o  
Description  
Displays the last diagnostic results file stored in the  
/etc/lpp/diagnostics/data directory  
-s mmddyy  
-a  
-r  
Displays all diagnostic result files logged since the date specified  
Displays the long version of the Diagnostic Event Log  
Displays the short version of the Diagnostic Event Log  
Display Resource Attributes  
This task displays the Customized Device Attributes associated with a selected  
resource. This task is similar to running the lsattr -E -l resource command.  
Display Service Hints  
This service aid reads and displays the information in the CEREADME file from the  
diagnostics media. This file contains information that is not contained in the publications  
for this version of the diagnostics. The file also contains information about using this  
particular version of diagnostics.  
Use the arrow keys to scroll through the information in the file.  
112 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Software Product Data  
This task uses SMIT to display information about the installed software and provides  
the following functions:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
List Installed Software  
List Applied but Not Committed Software Updates  
Show Software Installation History  
Show Fix (APAR) Installation Status  
List Fileset Requisites  
List Fileset Dependents  
List Files Included in a Fileset  
List File Owner by Fileset  
Display System Environmental Sensors  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This service aid displays the environmental sensors implemented on a CHRP system.  
The information displayed is the sensor name, physical location code, literal value of  
the sensor status, and the literal value of the sensor reading.  
The sensor status can be any one of the following:  
v
v
Normal - The sensor reading is within the normal operating range.  
Critical High - The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.  
v
v
Critical Low - The sensor reading indicates a serious problem with the device. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 to determine what repair action is needed.  
Warning High - The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could  
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to  
determine what repair action is needed.  
v
v
v
Warning Low - The sensor reading indicates a problem with the device. This could  
become a critical problem if action is not taken. Run diagnostics on sysplanar0 to  
determine what repair action is needed.  
Hardware Error - The sensor could not be read because of a hardware error. Run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem-determination mode to determine what repair  
action is needed.  
Hardware Busy - The system has repeatedly returned a busy indication, and a  
reading is not available. Try the service aid again. If the problem continues, run  
diagnostics on sysplanar0 in problem-determination mode to determine what repair  
action is needed.  
This service aid can also be run as a command. You can use the command to list the  
sensors and their values in a text format, list the sensors and their values in numerical  
format, or a specific sensor can be queried to return either the sensor status or sensor  
value.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Run the command by entering one of the following:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l | -a /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t  
token -i index [-v]  
Flag  
-l  
-a  
Description  
List the sensors and their values in a text format.  
List the sensors and their values in a numerical format. For each sensor, the  
following numerical values are displayed as: token index status measured  
value location code  
-t token  
-i index  
-v  
Specifies the sensor token to query.  
Specifies the sensor index to query.  
Indicates to return the sensor measured value. The sensor status is returned  
by default.  
Examples  
The following are examples from this command:  
1. Display a list of the environmental sensors: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -l  
Sensor = Fan Speed  
Status = Normal  
Value = 2436 RPM  
Location Code = F1  
Sensor = Power Supply  
Status = Normal  
Value = Present and operational  
Location Code = V1  
Sensor = Power Supply  
Status = Critical low  
Value = Present and not operational  
Location Code = V2  
2. Display a list of the environmental sensors in a numerical list:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -a  
3 0 11 87 P1  
9001 0 11 2345 F1  
9004 0 11 2 V1  
9004 1 9 2 V2  
3. Return the status of sensor 9004, index 1: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t  
9004 -i 1  
9
4. Return the value of sensor 9004, index 1: /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/uesensor -t  
9004 -i 1 -v  
2
114 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Display Test Patterns  
This service aid provides a means of adjusting system display units by providing test  
patterns that can be displayed. The user works through a series of menus to select the  
display type and test pattern. After the selections are made, the test pattern displays.  
Display USB Devices  
The following are the main functions of this service aid:  
v
v
Display a list of USB controllers on an adapter.  
Display a list of USB devices that are connected to the selected controller.  
To run the USB devices service aid, go to the diagnostics ″TASKS SELECTION″ menu,  
select ″Display USB Devices″. From the controller list that displayed on the screen,  
select one of the items that begins with ″OHCDX″, where ″X″ is a number. A list of  
devices attached to the controller displays.  
Download Microcode  
This service aid provides a way to copy microcode to an adapter or device. The service  
aid presents a list of adapters and devices that use microcode. After the adapter or  
device is selected, the service aid provides menus to guide you in checking the current  
level and downloading the needed microcode.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following sections for  
instructions on downloading to a particular type adapter or device.  
Download Microcode to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
See the following command syntax for a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter:  
diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "download [-B] [-D] [-P]"  
Flag  
-B  
-D  
Description  
Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode)  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-P  
Download Microcode to a PCI-X Dual Channel Adapter  
Microcode installation occurs while the adapter and attached drives are available for  
use. Before installation of the microcode, ensure that there is a current backup of the  
system available and it is recommended that the installation be scheduled during a  
non-peak production time period.  
Notes:  
1. If the source is /etc/microcode, the image must be stored in the /etc/microcode  
directory on the system. If the system is booted from a NIM server, the image must  
be stored in the usr/lib/microcode directory of the SPOT the client is booted from.  
2. If the source is diskette, the diskette must be in a backup format and the image  
stored in the /etc/microcode directory.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
See the following command syntax for a PCI-X Adapter:  
diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}]  
[-l {latest|previous}] [-f]"  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
No console mode. Run without user interaction.  
Device name is the name of the adapter.  
-d  
-f  
Force the installation even if the current level of microcode is not on the  
source.  
-l  
Level of microcode to install. The default is latest.  
-s  
-T  
Source of the new microcode image. The default is /etc/microcode.  
Use the download option to download microcode.  
Download Microcode to Disk Drive Attached to a PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
See the following command syntax for a disk drive attached to a PCI SCSI RAID  
Adapter:  
diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "download {-l chID | -A} [-D] [-P]"  
Flag  
-A  
-D  
-l  
Description  
All disk drives  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
RAID disk drive-physical disk channel/ID (example 27)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-P  
Download Microcode to a Fiber Channel Adapter  
Microcode installation occurs while the adapter and attached drives are available for  
use. It is recommended that a current backup be available and the installation be  
scheduled during a non-peak production time period.  
Note: If the source is diskette, the diskette must be in a backup format and the image  
stored in the /etc/microcode directory.  
Microcode installation occurs while the adapter and attached drives are available for  
use. Before installation of the microcode, ensure that a current backup of the system is  
available. It is recommended that the installation be scheduled during a non-peak  
production time period.  
Notes:  
1. If the source is /etc/microcode, the image must be stored in the /etc/microcode  
directory on the system. If the system is booted from a NIM server, the image must  
be stored in the usr/lib/microcode directory of the SPOT the client is booted from.  
2. If the source is diskette, the diskette must be in backup format and the image stored  
in the /etc/microcode directory.  
Note: If the source is diskette, the diskette must be in backup format and the image  
stored in the /etc/microcode directory.  
116 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
See the following command syntax for a PCI FC-ALFiber Channel Adapter.  
diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}] [-l  
{latest|previous}] [-f]"  
Flag  
-c  
-d  
-T  
-s  
Description  
No console mode. Run without user interaction.  
Device name is the name of the adapter.  
Use the download option to download microcode.  
Source of the new microcode image. Default is /etc/microcode.  
Level of microcode to install. The default is latest.  
Force the installation even if the current level of microcode is not on the  
source.  
-l  
-f  
Download Microcode to DVD-RAM Attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter  
See the following command syntax for a DVD-RAM attached to a PCI SCSI Adapter:  
diag [-c] -d cdX -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}]  
[-l {latest|previous}] [-f]"  
Flag  
-c  
cdX  
-s  
-l  
-f  
Description  
No console mode. Run without user interaction  
Device selected, for example, cd0.  
Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode.  
Level of microcode image to be installed. Latest in default  
Install the microcode on the device even if the current level is unavailable on  
the source.  
Download Microcode to Disk Attached to PCI SCSI Adapter  
See following command syntax for a disk drive attached to a PCI SCSI adapter:  
diag [-c] -d hdiskX -T "download [-s {/etc/microcode|diskette}]  
[-l {latest|previous}] [-f]"  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
No console mode. Run without user interaction  
-d hdiskX  
Selected device, for example, hdisk0.  
-T download  
Download microcode task.  
-s  
-l  
-f  
Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode.  
Level of microcode image to be installed. Latest in default  
Install the microcode on the device even if the current level is unavailable on  
the source.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Download Microcode to Other Devices  
See the following command syntax:  
diag -c -d device_name -T "download [-s diskette] [-l previous] [-F]"  
Flag Description  
-F Force the download microcode even if the current level is unavailable on the  
source.  
-l  
Microcode level. Latest is default.  
-s  
Source of the new microcode. The default is /etc/microcode. Default source  
device is disk.  
Fault Indicators  
Note: Prior to Diagnostics version 5.1.0.35, this task was also known as the System  
Fault Indicator task.  
This task is used to display or reset the Fault Indicators on the systems that support  
this function. This task may also be used to set the Fault Indicators for testing  
purposes, but the Indicators are not set back to normal when you exit this task.  
The Fault Indicators are used to identify a fault with the system. These indicators may  
be set automatically by hardware, firmware, or diagnostics when a fault is detected in  
the system.  
The Fault Indicators are turned off when a Log Repair Action is performed. After a  
serviceable event is complete, do a System Verification to verify the fix. Also do a Log  
Repair Action if the test on the resource was good, and that resource had an entry in  
the error log. If the serviceable event was not a result of an error log entry, use the Log  
Repair Action Task to turn off the system fault indicator.  
For additional information concerning the use of these indicators, refer to the system  
guide.  
Note: The AIX command does not allow you to set the fault indicators to the Fault  
state.  
Use the following command syntax:  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/usysfault [-s normal] [-l location code]  
Flag  
Description  
-s normal  
-l location code  
Sets the Fault Indicator to the normal state.  
Identifies the resource by physical location code.  
When the command is used without the -s flag, the current state of the indicator is  
displayed as normal or attention.  
When teh command is used without the -l flag, the Primary Enclosure resource is used.  
118 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Use the -l flag only in systems that have more than one fault indicator.  
Note: See also the “Identify and System Attention Indicators” on page 126. Some  
systems that do not support Fault Indicators have a similar System Attention  
Indicator.  
Fibre Channel RAID Service Aids  
The Fibre Channel RAID service aids contain the following functions:  
Certify LUN  
This selection reads and checks each block of data in the logical unit number  
(LUN). If excessive errors are encountered, the user is notified.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath  
command: diag -T "certify"  
Certify Spare Physical Disk  
This selection allows the user to certify (check integrity of the data) drives that  
are designated as spares.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath  
command: diag -T "certify"  
Format Physical Disk  
This selection is used to format a selected disk drive.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath  
command: diag -T "format"  
Array Controller Microcode Download  
This selection allows the microcode on the Fibre Channel RAID controller to be  
updated when required.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath  
command: diag -T "download"  
Physical Disk Microcode Download  
This selection is used to update the microcode on any of the disk drives in the  
array.  
You can run this task from the AIX command line. Use the following fastpath  
command: diag -T "download"  
Update EEPROM  
This selection is used to update the contents of the electronically erasable  
programmable read-only memory (EEPROM) on a selected controller.  
Replace Controller  
Use this selection when it is necessary to replace a controller in the array.  
Flash SK-NET FDDI Firmware  
This task allows the Flash firmware on the SysKonnect SK-NET FDDI adapter to be  
updated.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Format Media  
This task allows the selection of diskettes, hardfiles, or optical media to be formatted.  
Each selection is described below.  
Hardfile Attached to SCSI Adapter (non-RAID)  
v
Hardfile Format  
Writes all of the disk. The pattern written on the disk is device-dependent; for  
example some drives may write all 0s, while some may write the hexadecimal  
number 5F. No bad block reassignment occurs  
v
v
Hardfile Format and Certify  
Performs the same function as Hardfile Format. After the format is completed, Certify  
is run. Certify then reassigns all bad blocks encountered.  
Hardfile Erase Disk  
This option can be used to overwrite (remove) all data currently stored in  
user-accessible blocks of the disk. The Erase Disk option writes one or more  
patterns to the disk. An additional option allows data in a selectable block to be read  
and displayed on the system console.  
To use the Erase Disk option, specify the number (0-3) of patterns to be written. The  
patterns are written serially; that is, the first pattern is written to all blocks. Then the  
next pattern is written to all blocks, overlaying the previous pattern. A random pattern  
is written by selecting the Write Random Pattern? option.  
Note: The Erase Disk service aid has not been certified as meeting the Department  
of Defense or any other organization’s security guidelines.  
Use the following steps to overwrite the data on the drive:  
1. Use the Erase Disk selection to overwrite the data on the drive.  
2. Do a format without certify.  
3. Run a second pass of the Erase Disk selection.  
For a newly installed drive, you can ensure that all blocks on the drive are  
overwritten with your pattern if you use the following procedure:  
1. Format the drive.  
2. Check the defect MAP by running the Erase Disk selection.  
Note: If you use the Format and Certify option, there may be some blocks  
which get placed into the grown defect MAP.  
3. If there are bad blocks in the defect MAP, record the information presented and  
ensure that this information is kept with the drive. This data is used later when  
the drive is to be overwritten.  
4. Use the drive as you would normally.  
5. When the drive is no longer needed and is to be erased, run the same version of  
the Erase Disk selection which was used in step 2.  
Note: Using the same version of the service aid is only critical if any bad blocks  
were found in step 3.  
120 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Compare the bad blocks which were recorded for the drive in step 3 with those  
that now appear in the grown defect MAP.  
Note: If there are differences between the saved data and the newly obtained  
data, then all sectors on this drive cannot be overwritten. The new bad  
blocks are not overwritten.  
7. If the bad block list is the same, continue running the service aid to overwrite the  
disk with the chosen pattern(s).  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the command syntax:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s* fmtcert | erase -a {read | write}] [-F]"  
Flag  
Description  
fmtcert Formats and certifies the disk.  
*
Available in no-console mode only.  
-F  
Force the disk erasure even if all blocks cannot be erased due to errors  
accessing grown defect map.  
Note: The Erase Disk option in command line mode uses default values. To selectively  
read or write, use the diag command in console mode.  
Hardfile Attached to PCI SCSI RAID Adapter  
This function formats the physical disks attached to a PCI SCSI RAID adapter. This  
task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d RAIDadapterName -T "format {-l chId | -A }"  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (An example of a physical disk channel/ID is 27,  
where the channel is 2 and the ID is 7.)  
All disks  
-A  
Optical Media  
Use the following functions to check and verify optical media:  
v
Optical Media Initialize  
Formats the media without certifying. This function does not reassign the defective  
blocks or erase the data on the media. This option provides a quick way of formatting  
the media and cleaning the disk.  
Note: It takes approximately one minute to format the media.  
v
Optical Media Format and Certify  
Formats and certifies the media. This function reassigns the defective blocks and  
erases all data on the media.  
This task can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T "format [-s {initialize | fmtcert} ]"  
Option Description  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
initialize  
Formats media without certifying  
fmtcert Formats and certifies the media  
Diskette Format  
This selection formats a diskette by writing patterns to it.  
Gather System Information  
This service aid uses the AIX snap command to collect configuration information on  
networks, filesystems, security, the kernel, the ODM, and other system components.  
You can also choose to collect SSA adapter and disk drive configuration data, or AIX  
trace information for software debugging.  
The output of the SNAP service aid can be used by field service personnel or it can be  
put on removable media and transferred to remote locations for more extensive  
analysis.  
To use the SNAP task, select Gather System Information from the task list. You can  
select which components you want to collect information for, and where to store the  
data (hard disk or removable media).  
Generic Microcode Download  
The Generic Microcode Download service aid provides a means of executing a  
genucode script from a diskette or tape. The purpose of this generic script is to load  
microcode to a supported resource.  
The genucode program should be downloaded onto diskette or tape in tar format while  
the microcode image itself goes onto another one in restore format. Running the  
Generic Microcode Download task will search for the genucode script on diskette or  
tape and execute it. It will ask for a Genucode media to be inserted into the drive. The  
service aid moves the genucode script file to the /tmp directory and runs the program  
that downloads the microcode to the adapter or device.  
This service aid is supported in both concurrent and standalone modes from disk, LAN,  
or loadable media.  
Hot Plug Task  
The Hot Plug Task provides software function for those devices that support hot-plug or  
hot-swap capability. This includes PCI adapters, SCSI devices, and some RAID  
devices. This task was previously known as ″SCSI Device Identification and Removal″  
or ″Identify and Remove Resource.″  
The Hot Plug Task has a restriction when running in Standalone or Online Service  
mode; new devices may not be added to the system unless there is already a device  
122 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
with the same FRU part number installed in the system. This restriction is in place  
because the device software package for the new device cannot be installed in  
Standalone or Online Service mode.  
Depending on the environment and the software packages installed, selecting this task  
displays the following three subtasks:  
v
v
v
PCI Hot Plug Manager  
SCSI Hot Swap Manager  
RAID Hot Plug Devices  
To run the Hot Plug Task directly from the command line, type the following: diag  
-T"identifyRemove"  
If you are running the diagnostics in Online Concurrent mode, run the Missing Options  
Resolution Procedure immediately after removing any device.  
If the Missing Options Resolution Procedure runs with no menus or prompts, then  
device configuration is complete. Otherwise, work through the missing options menu to  
complete device configuration (in diagnostics prior to version 5.2.0) or (in diagnostics  
version 5.2.0 and later) select the device that has an uppercase M shown in front of it in  
the resource list for missing options processing to be done on that resource.  
PCI Hot Plug Manager  
The PCI Hot Plug Manager task is a SMIT menu that allows you to identify, add,  
remove, or replace PCI adapters that are hot-pluggable. The following functions are  
available under this task:  
v
v
v
v
v
v
v
List PCI Hot Plug Slots  
Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter  
Replace/Remove a PCI Hot Plug Adapter  
Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot  
Unconfigure Devices  
Configure Devices  
Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL  
The List PCI Hot Plug Slots function lists all PCI hot-plug slots. Empty slots and  
populated slots are listed. Populated slot information includes the connected logical  
device. The slot name consists of the physical location code and the description of the  
physical characteristics for the slot.  
The Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter function is used to prepare a slot for the addition of  
a new adapter. The function lists all the empty slots that support hot plug. When a slot  
is selected, the visual indicator for the slot blinks at the Identify rate. After the slot  
location is confirmed, the visual indicator for the specified PCI slot is set to the Action  
state. This means the power for the PCI slot is off and the new adapter can be plugged  
in.  
The Replace/Remove a PCI Hot Plug Adapter function is used to prepare a slot for  
adapter exchange. The function lists all the PCI slots that support hot plug and are  
occupied. The list includes the slot’s physical location code and the device name of the  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
resource installed in the slot. The adapter must be in the Defined state before it can be  
prepared for hot-plug removal. When a slot is selected, the visual indicator for the slot  
is set to the Identify state. After the slot location is confirmed, the visual indicator for the  
specified PCI slot is set to the Action state. This means the power for the PCI slot, is off  
and the adapter can be removed or replaced.  
The Identify a PCI Hot Plug Slot function is used to help identify the location of a PCI  
hot-plug adapter. The function lists all the PCI slots that are occupied or empty and  
support hot plug. When a slot is selected for identification, the visual indicator for the  
slot is set to the Identify state.  
The Unconfigure Devices function attempts to put the selected device, in the PCI  
hot-plug slot, into the Defined state. This action must be done before any attempted  
hot-plug function. If the unconfigure function fails, it is possible that the device is still in  
use by another application. In this case, the customer or system administrator must be  
notified to quiesce the device.  
The Configure Devices function allows a newly added adapter to be configured into  
the system for use. This function should also be done when a new adapter is added to  
the system.  
The Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL function attempts to install the  
necessary software packages for any newly added devices. The software installation  
media or packages are required for this function.  
Standalone Diagnostics has restrictions on using the PCI Hot-Plug Manager. For  
example:  
v
Adapters that are replaced must be exactly the same FRU part number as the  
adapter being replaced.  
v
New adapters cannot be added unless a device of the same FRU part number  
already exists in the system, because the configuration information for the new  
adapter is not known after the Standalone Diagnostics are booted.  
v
The following functions are not available from the Standalone Diagnostics and will  
not display in the list:  
–
–
–
Add a PCI Hot Plug Adapter  
Configure Devices  
Install/Configure Devices Added After IPL  
You can run this task directly from the command line by typing the following command:  
diag -d device -T"identifyRemove"  
However, note that some devices support both the PCI Hot-Plug task and the RAID  
Hot-Plug Devices task. If this is the case for the device specified, then the Hot Plug  
Task displays instead of the PCI Hot Plug Manager menu.  
More detailed information concerning PCI Hot-Plug Manager can be found in the AIX  
Operating System, System Management Guide.  
124 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Hot Swap Manager  
This task was known as ″SCSI Device Identification and Removal″ or ″Identify and  
Remove Resources″ in previous releases. This task allows the user to identify, add,  
remove, and replace a SCSI device in a system unit that uses a SCSI Enclosure  
Services (SES) device. The following functions are available:  
v
v
v
v
v
List the SES Devices  
Identify a Device Attached to an SES Device  
Attach a Device to an SES Device  
Replace/Remove a Device Attached to an SES Device  
Configure Added/Replaced Devices  
The List the SES Devices function lists all the SCSI hot-swap slots and their contents.  
Status information about each slot is also available. The status information available  
includes the slot number, device name, whether the slot is populated and configured,  
and location.  
The Identify a Device Attached to an SES Device function is used to help identify the  
location of a device attached to a SES device. This function lists all the slots that  
support hot swap that are occupied or empty. When a slot is selected for identification,  
the visual indicator for the slot is set to the Identify state.  
The Attach a Device to an SES Device function lists all empty hot-swap slots that are  
available for the insertion of a new device. After a slot is selected, the power is  
removed. If available, the visual indicator for the selected slot is set to the Remove  
state. After the device is added, the visual indicator for the selected slot is set to the  
Normal state, and power is restored.  
The Replace/Remove a Device Attached to an SES Device function lists all  
populated hot-swap slots that are available for removal or replacement of the devices.  
After a slot is selected, the device populating that slot is Unconfigured; then the power  
is removed from that slot. If the Unconfigure operation fails, it is possible that the device  
is in use by another application. In this case, the customer or system administrator must  
be notified to quiesce the device. If the Unconfigure operation is successful, the visual  
indicator for the selected slot is set to the Remove state. After the device is removed or  
replaced, the visual indicator, if available for the selected slot, is set to the Normal state,  
and power is restored.  
Note: Be sure that no other host is using the device before you remove it.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Configure Added/Replaced Devices function runs the configuration manager on  
the parent adapters that had child devices added or removed. This function ensures  
that the devices in the configuration database are configured correctly.  
Standalone Diagnostics has restrictions on using the SCSI Hot Plug Manager. For  
example:  
v
Devices being used as replacement devices must be exactly the same type of device  
as the device being replaced.  
v
New devices may not be added unless a device of the same FRU part number  
already exists in the system, because the configuration information for the new  
device is not known after the Standalone Diagnostics are booted.  
You can run this task directly from the command line. See the following command  
syntax:  
diag -d device-T"identifyRemove"  
OR  
diag [-c] -d device -T"identifyRemove -a [identify|remove]"  
Flag  
-a  
Description  
Specifies the option under the task.  
-c  
Run the task without displaying menus. Only command line prompts are used.  
This flag is only applicable when running an option such as identify or remove.  
-d  
-T  
Indicates the SCSI device.  
Specifies the task to run.  
RAID Hot Plug Devices  
This selection starts the PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID Adapter Service Aid.  
Identify Indicators  
See the “Identify and System Attention Indicators” for a description of the Identify  
Indicators task.  
Identify and System Attention Indicators  
Note: Prior to Diagnostics version 5.1.0.35, this task may also have been known as the  
System Identify Indicator or Identify Indicators task.  
This task is used to display or set the Identify Indicators and the single system attention  
indicator on the systems that support this function.  
Some systems may support the Identify Indicators or the Attention Indicators. The  
Identify Indicator is used to help physically identify the system in a large equipment  
room. The Attention Indicator is used to help physically identify a system with a fault in  
a large equipment room.  
126 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
When a fault has been detected on a system that supports the Attention Indicator, the  
Indicator is set to an Attention condition. After the failing system has been identified and  
the problem fixed, the Attention Indicator changes back to normal. This should be done  
by the Log Repair Action Task.  
Note: It is important to run the Log Repair Action function. This action keeps the Fault  
Indicator from going back to the Fault state due to a previous error in the error  
log that has already been serviced.  
For additional information concerning the use of this indicator, refer to the system guide.  
This task can also be run directly from the command line by typing  
/usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/usysident [-s {normal | identify}] [-l location code]  
Flag  
Description  
-s {normal | identify}  
Sets the state of the System Identify Indicator to  
either normal or identify.  
-l location code  
Identifies the resource by physical location code.  
When this command is used without the -l flag, the Primary Enclosure resource is used.  
Use the -l flag only in systems that have more than one Identify and System attention  
indicator.  
When this command is used without -s flag, the current state of the identify indicator is  
displayed.  
For more information on the tasks, see Chapter 6, “Introduction to Tasks and Service  
Aids” on page 93.  
Local Area Network Analyzer  
This selection is used to exercise the LAN communications adapters (Token-Ring,  
Ethernet, and (FDDI) Fiber Distributed Data Interface). The following services are  
available:  
v
Connectivity testing between two network stations. Data is transferred between the  
two stations, requiring the user to provide the Internet addresses of both stations.  
v
Monitoring ring (Token-Ring only). The ring is monitored for a specified period of  
time. Soft and hard errors are analyzed.  
Log Repair Action  
The Log Repair Action task logs a repair action in the AIX Error Log. A Repair Action  
log indicates that a FRU has been replaced, and error log analysis should not be done  
for any errors logged before the repair action. The Log Repair Action task lists all  
resources. Replaced resources can be selected from the list, and when commit (F7  
key) is selected, a repair action is logged for each selected resource.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Periodic Diagnostics  
This selection provides a tool for configuring periodic diagnostics and automatic error  
log analysis. You can select a hardware resource to be tested once a day, at a  
user-specified time.  
Hardware errors logged against a resource can also be monitored by enabling  
automatic error log analysis. This allows error log analysis to be performed every time a  
hardware error is put into the error log. If a problem is detected, a message is posted to  
the system console and either sent to the Service Focal Point when there is an  
attached HMC, or a mail message to the users belonging to the system group  
containing information about the failure, such as the service request number.  
The service aid provides the following functions:  
v
v
v
v
v
Add or delete a resource to the periodic test list  
Modify the time to test a resource  
Display the periodic test list  
Modify the error notification mailing list  
Disable or enable automatic error log analysis  
PCI RAID Physical Disk Identify  
This selection identifies physical disks connected to a PCI SCSI-2 F/W RAID adapter.  
You can run this task directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d pci RAID adapter -T identify  
Process Supplemental Media  
Diagnostic Supplemental Media contains all the necessary diagnostic programs and  
files required to test a particular resource. The supplemental media is normally released  
and shipped with the resource as indicated on the diskette label. Diagnostic  
Supplemental Media must be used when the device support has not been incorporated  
into the latest diagnostic CD-ROM.  
This task processes the Diagnostic Supplemental Media. Insert the supplemental media  
when you are prompted; then press Enter. After processing has completed, go to the  
Resource Selection list to find the resource to test.  
Notes:  
1. This task is supported in Standalone Diagnostics only.  
2. Process and test one resource at a time. Run diagnostics after each supplemental  
media is processed. (for example; If you need to process two supplemental media  
you need to run diagnostic twice. Once after each supplement media is processed.)  
128 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Run Diagnostics  
The Run Diagnostics task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the commit  
key is pressed, diagnostics are run on all selected resources.  
The procedures for running the diagnostics depends on the state of the diagnostics  
run-time options. See “Display or Change Diagnostic Run-Time Options” on page 110.  
Run Error Log Analysis  
The Run Error Log Analysis task invokes the Resource Selection List menu. When the  
commit key is pressed, Error Log Analysis is run on all selected resources.  
Run Exercisers  
The Run Exercisers task provides a tool to troubleshoot intermittent system problems in  
AIX 4.3.2 or later, to test hardware, and to verify replacement parts. When AIX error  
logging is enabled, the Run Error Log Analysis task can be used to analyze errors after  
the exerciser completes. Hardware errors are logged in the AIX Error Log. Miscompares  
and recoverable errors are not reported, however, they may be logged in the AIX Error  
Log when logging thresholds are exceeded.  
The diagnostic supervisor typically sets up temporary work files in /tmp to log  
messages and device statistics. These files are deleted before an exerciser session  
begins. In addition to individual exerciser requirements, the following requirements  
pertain to all exercisers:  
v
v
v
v
Only supported on CHRP platforms  
Only supported in concurrent or service modes  
Not supported from standalone diagnostics  
System performance will be degraded while running the exerciser, so it is  
recommended that customer applications be shut down before it is run.  
At least 1 MB of free storage in /tmp is available  
v
From the TASK SELECTION LIST menu select Run Exercisers then the RESOURCES  
SELECTION LIST menu displays. From this menu choose the resources you want to  
exercise and then select commit to start the Run Exerciser task. An intermediate  
popup may appear stating system performance will be degraded. (The popup does not  
appear if the task had previously been selected). Press Enter and the EXERCISER  
OPTIONS menu prompts for the type of test to run.  
The EXERCISER OPTIONS menu displays two options (1) Short Exercise and (2)  
Extended Exercise. The Short Exercise option exercises the resources within a  
relatively short time and exits. The Extended Exercise option allows greater flexibility  
and control over resources and test duration.  
After choosing the Short Exercise option, additional menus, pop-ups and prompts may  
appear for each resource. Please read any text and carefully fill out any prompts before  
committing. Next, the exercisers start, and the Device Status Screen displays. The  
exercisers runs 5 to 10 minutes depending on the number of processors, processor  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
speed, memory size, and I/O configuration. After choosing the Extended Exercise  
option, additional menus, pop-ups and prompts may appear for each resource. Please  
read any text and carefully fill out any prompts before committing. Following, the  
System Exerciser Main Menu displays. From this menu the exercisers can be  
activated through option 1 where they will continuously run until halted (option 2) or  
exited (option x). See also the help text for information on how to use other available  
options.  
When the task completes any errors that were encountered are displayed for review.  
Finally, an Exerciser Complete popup displays. To continue, press the Enter key.  
Following, you will be taken back to the TASK SELECTION LIST menu. If miscompare  
errors were encountered, run diagnostics on the resource. If the problem is not reported  
then contact your service support structure. If any other errors were encountered, select  
and run the Error Log Analysis task. If Error Log Analysis does not report a problem  
then contact your service support structure.  
Exerciser Commands (CMD)  
Use the following commands as needed in the exerciser menus and reports. Not all  
commands are available in each menu or report.  
CMD  
Description  
a
b
c
e
f
Acknowledge an error  
Back one page  
Toggle between cycle count and last error  
View the AIX error log  
Page forward one page  
Return to Main Menu  
Refresh screen  
q
r
s
x
Enable or disable beep on error  
Exit system exerciser  
Abbreviations  
The following list describes abbreviations used in the exerciser reports.  
Acronym  
COE  
CP  
DD  
ER  
Description  
Continue on error (use number to select).  
Device has run the specified number of cycles and is not running.  
The exerciser has been terminated by a signal.  
Device has stopped with an error.  
The device is hung.  
HG  
HOE  
RN  
Halt on error (use number to select).  
Device is running.  
ST  
Device is stopped.  
130 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Memory Exerciser  
The memory exercisers are labeled memx, where x is a number for the exerciser.  
Multiple exercisers can be active.  
The memory exerciser requests as many memory buffers as possible from AIX. The  
exerciser then fills the memory buffers with specified bit patterns, then reads and  
compares the memory buffers to the specified bit patterns.  
The memory exerciser is labeled mem0. The exerciser requests as many memory buffers  
as possible from AIX. The exerciser fills these buffers with specified bit patterns and  
then compares them to the original bit patterns. If memory is removed as a result of  
Dynamic Reconfiguration, the exerciser terminates.  
On systems with multiple processors, a process is started for each processor. The free  
memory space is split evenly between the available processors, thus reducing the time  
required to exercise all of the memory.  
Running this service aid requires 128 KB of free space in /etc/lpp/diagnostics/data.  
Tape Exerciser  
The tape exerciser is labeled rmtx, where x is the number of a specific device. The  
exerciser performs read, write, and compare operations using known data patterns. A  
tape device and Test Diagnostic Cartridge are required to run this exerciser. The actual  
Test Diagnostics Cartridge depends upon the specific tape device being tested. The  
exerciser automatically rewinds the tape. Test Requirements are:  
v
Tape device  
v
Test Diagnostic Cartridge; (P/N depends upon tape device)  
Diskette Exerciser  
The diskette exerciser is labeled fdx, where x is the number of a specific device. The  
exerciser performs read, write, and compare operations using known data patterns. A  
scratch diskette is required to run this exerciser, data on the scratch diskette is  
destroyed. Test requirements are:  
v
Diskette device  
Scratch diskette (data on diskette is destroyed)  
v
CD-ROM Exerciser  
The CD-ROM exerciser is labeled cdx, where x is the number of a specific device. The  
exerciser performs read and compare operations using known data patterns. A  
CD-ROM device and a Test Disc is required to run this exerciser. Test requirements are:  
v
CD-ROM device  
Test Disc P/N 81F8902  
v
Floating Point Exerciser  
The floating point exerciser is labeled procx, where x is the number of the processor  
containing the floating point unit. The exerciser performs load/store and arithmetic  
operations using floating point registers and instructions. The floating point instructions  
are executed using static values and the outcome of the operation is compared with the  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
expected result. Any mismatch results in an error condition. If the processor is in use by  
the exerciser and is removed as a result of dynamic logical partitioning, the exerciser  
terminates.  
132 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SCSI Bus Analyzer  
This service aid allows you to diagnose a SCSI bus problem in a freelance mode.  
To use this service aid, the user should understand how a SCSI bus works. Use this  
service aid when the diagnostics cannot communicate with anything on the SCSI bus  
and cannot isolate the problem. Normally the procedure for finding a problem on the  
SCSI bus with this service aid is to start with a single device attached, ensure that it is  
working, then start adding additional devices and cables to the bus, ensuring that each  
one works. This service aid works with any valid SCSI bus configuration.  
The SCSI Bus Service Aid transmits a SCSI Inquiry command to a selectable SCSI  
Address. The service aid then waits for a response. If no response is received within a  
defined amount of time, the service aid displays a timeout message. If an error occurs  
or a response is received, the service aid then displays one of the following messages:  
v
v
v
v
v
The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and received a valid  
response back without any errors being detected.  
The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and did not receive any  
response or error status back.  
The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and the adapter indicated  
a SCSI bus error.  
The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and an adapter error  
occurred.  
The service aid transmitted a SCSI Inquiry Command and a check condition  
occur.  
When the SCSI Bus Service Aid is started a description of the service aid displays.  
Pressing the Enter key displays the Adapter Selection menu. Use this menu to enter the  
address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.  
When the adapter is selected, the SCSI Bus Address Selection menu displays. Use this  
menu to enter the address to transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command.  
After the address is selected, the SCSI Bus Test Run menu displays. Use this menu to  
transmit the SCSI Inquiry Command by pressing Enter. The service aid then indicates  
the status of the transmission. When the transmission is completed, the results of the  
transmission displays.  
Notes:  
1. A Check Condition can be returned when the bus or device is working correctly.  
2. AIX does not allow the command to be sent if the device is in use by another  
process.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SCSD Tape Drive Service Aid  
This service aid allows you to obtain the status or maintenance information from a  
SCSD tape drive. Not all models of SCSD tape drive are supported.  
The service aid provides the following options:  
v
v
Display time since a tape drive was last cleaned. The time since the drive was last  
cleaned displays on the screen, as well as a message regarding whether the drive is  
recommended to be cleaned.  
Copy a tape drive’s trace table. The trace table of the tape drive is written to  
diskettes or a file. The diskettes must be formatted for DOS. Writing the trace table  
may require several diskettes. The actual number of diskettes is determined by the  
size of the trace table. Label the diskettes as follows:  
TRACEx.DAT (where x is a sequential diskette number). The complete trace table  
consists of the sequential concatenation of all the diskette data files.  
When the trace table is written to a disk file, the service aid prompts for a file name.  
The default name is: /tmp/TRACE.x, where x is the AIX name of the SCSD tape  
drive being tested.  
v
Display or copy a tape drive’s log sense information. The service aid provides  
options to display the log sense information to the screen, to copy it to a DOS  
formatted diskette, or to copy it to a file. The file name LOGSENSE.DAT is used  
when the log sense data is written to the diskette. The service aid prompts for a file  
name when you have selected that the log sense data is to be copied to a file.  
This service aid can be run directly from the AIX command line. See the following  
command syntax (path is /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin/utape):  
utape [-h | -?] [-d device] [-n | -l | -t]  
OR  
utape -c -d device [-v] {-n | {-l | -t} { -D | -f [ filename]}}  
Flag  
-c  
Description  
Run the service aid without displaying menus. The return code indicates  
success or failure. The output is suppressed except for the usage statement  
and the numeric value for hours since cleaning (if -n and -D flags are used).  
-D  
-f  
Copy data to diskette.  
Copy data to the file name given after this flag or to a default file name if no  
name is specified.  
-h, -?  
Display a usage statement and/or return code. If the -c flag is present, only the  
return code displays to indicate the service aid did not run. If the -c is not  
used, a usage statement displays and the service aid exits.  
-l  
Display or copy log sense information.  
Display time since drive was last cleaned.  
Copy trace table.  
-n  
-t  
-v  
Verbose mode. If the -c flag is present, the information displays on the screen.  
If the -n flag is present, the information about tape-head cleaning is printed.  
134 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Spare Sector Availability  
This selection checks the number of spare sectors available on the optical disk. The  
spare sectors are used to reassign when defective sectors are encountered during  
normal usage or during a format and certify operation. Low availability of spare sectors  
indicates that the disk needs to be backed up and replaced. Formatting the disk does  
not improve the availability of spare sectors.  
You can run this task directly from the AIX command line. See the following command  
syntax: diag -c -d deviceName -T chkspares  
SSA Service Aid  
This service aid provides tools for diagnosing and resolving problems on SSA-attached  
devices. The following tools are provided:  
v
v
v
v
Set Service Mode  
Link Verification  
Configuration Verification  
Format and Certify Disk  
System Fault Indicator  
For a description of the System Fault Indicator task, see “Fault Indicators” on page 118.  
System Identify Indicator  
For a description of the System Fault Indicator task, see “Identify and System Attention  
Indicators” on page 126.  
Update Disk-Based Diagnostics  
This service aid allows fixes (APARs) to be applied.  
This task invokes the SMIT Update Software by Fix (APAR) task. The task allows the  
input device and APARs to be selected. You can install any APAR using this task.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Update System or Service Processor Flash  
Attention: If the system is running on a logically partitioned system, ask the customer  
or system administrator if a service partition has been designated.  
v
If it has, ask the customer or system administrator to shut down all of the partitions  
except the one with service authority. The firmware update can then be done using  
the service aid or the AIX command line in that partition.  
v
If a service partition has not been designated, the system must be shut down. If the  
firmware update image is available on backup diskettes, the firmware update can  
then be done from the service processor menus as a privileged user. If the firmware  
update image is in a file on the system, reboot the system in a full machine partition  
and use the following normal firmware update procedures.  
If the system is already in a full machine partition, use the following normal firmware  
update procedures:  
Note: This service aid runs on CHRP system units only.  
This selection updates the system or service processor flash for CHRP system units.  
Some systems may have separate images for system and service processor firmware;  
newer systems have a combined image that contains both in one image.  
Look for additional update and recovery instructions with the update kit. You need to  
know the fully qualified path and file name of the flash update image file provided in the  
kit. If the update image file is on a diskette, the service aid can list the files on the  
diskette for selection. The diskette must be a valid backup format diskette.  
Refer to the update instructions with the kit, or the service guide for the system unit to  
determine the current level of the system unit or service processor flash memory.  
When this service aid is run from online diagnostics, the flash update image file is  
copied to the /var file system. It is recommended that the source of the microcode that  
you want to download be put into the /etc/microcode directory on the system. If there  
is not enough space in the /var file system for the new flash update image file, an error  
is reported. If this error occurs, exit the service aid, increase the size of the /var file  
system, and retry the service aid. After the file is copied, a screen requests confirmation  
before continuing with the flash update. When you continue the update flash, the  
system reboots using the shutdown -u command. The system does not return to the  
diagnostics, and the current flash image is not saved. After the reboot, you can remove  
the /var/update_flash_image file.  
When this service aid is run from standalone diagnostics, the flash update image file is  
copied to the file system from diskette or from the NIM server. Using a diskette, the  
user must provide the image on backup format diskette because the user does not  
have access to remote file systems or any other files that are on the system. If using  
the NIM server, the microcode image must first be copied onto the NIM server in the  
/usr/lib/microcode directory pointed to the NIM SPOT (from which you plan to have  
the NIM client boot standalone diagnostics) prior to performing the NIM boot of  
136 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
diagnostics. Next, a NIM check operation must be run on the SPOT containing the  
microcode image on the NIM server. After performing the NIM boot of diagnostics one  
can use this service aid to update the microcode from the NIM server by choosing the  
/usr/lib/microcode directory when prompted for the source of the microcode that you  
want to update. If not enough space is available, an error is reported, stating additional  
system memory is needed. After the file is copied, a screen requests confirmation  
before continuing with the flash update. When you continue with the update, the system  
reboots using the reboot -u command. You may receive a Caution: some process(es)  
wouldn’t die message during the reboot process, you can ignore this message. The  
current flash image is not saved.  
You can use the update_flash command in place of this service aid. The command is  
located in the /usr/lpp/diagnostics/bin directory. The command syntax is as follows:  
update_flash [-q] -f file_name  
update_flash [-q] -D device_name -f file_name  
update_flash [-q] -D update_flash [-q] -D device_name -l  
Flag  
-D  
Description  
Specifies that the flash update image file is on diskette. The device_name  
variable specifies the diskette drive. The default device_name is /dev/fd0.  
-f  
Flash update image file source. The file_name variable specifies the fully  
qualified path of the flash update image file.  
-l  
Lists the files on a diskette, from which the user can choose a flash update  
image file.  
-q  
Forces the update_flash command to update the flash EPROM and reboot  
the system without asking for confirmation.  
Attention: The update_flash command reboots the entire system. Do not use this  
command if more than one user is logged on to the system.  
7135 RAIDiant Array Service Aid  
The 7135 RAIDiant Array service aids contain the following functions:  
v
Certify LUN  
Reads and checks each block of data in the logical unit number (LUN). If excessive  
errors are encountered, the user is notified.  
v
Certify Spare Physical Disk  
Allows the user to certify (check the integrity of the data) on drives designated as  
spares.  
v
v
v
Format Physical Disk  
Formats a selected disk drive.  
Array Controller Microcode Download  
Allows the microcode on the 7135 controller to be updated when required.  
Physical Disk Microcode Download  
Updates the microcode on any of the disk drives in the array.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
v
v
Update EEPROM  
Updates the contents of the EEPROM on a selected controller.  
Replace Controller  
Replaces a controller in the array.  
138 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command Examples  
Use this command syntax to download the adapter microcode:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "download [-B][-D][-P]"  
Flag  
-B  
-D  
Description  
Download boot block microcode (default to functional microcode)  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-P  
Use this command syntax to download physical disk microcode:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "download -l ChId [-D][-P]"  
Flag  
-D  
-l  
Description  
Microcode is on diskette (default to /etc/microcode directory)  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)  
Download the previous level of microcode (default to latest level)  
-P  
Use this command syntax to format a physical disk:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "format -l ChId″  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 27)  
Use this command syntax to certify a physical disk:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "certify -l ChId″  
Flag  
-l  
Description  
Physical disk channel/ID (for example, 23)  
Use this command syntax to identify a physical disk:  
diag -c -d deviceName -T "identify"  
7318 Serial Communications Network Server Service Aid  
This service aid provides a tool for diagnosing terminal server problems.  
Chapter 6. Introduction to Tasks and Service Aids 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
140 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation  
The system verification procedure checks the system for correct hardware operation.  
Run the system verification procedure as described in the following steps.  
If you are analyzing a hardware problem, see Chapter 8, “Hardware Problem  
Determination” on page 145.  
Step 1. Considerations Before Running This Procedure  
Read the following before using this procedure:  
v
v
v
v
v
The AIX operating system must be installed on your system before you attempt to  
perform this procedure.  
If this system unit is directly attached to another system unit or attached to a  
network, be sure communications with the other systems are stopped.  
This procedure requires use of all of the system resources. No other activity can be  
running on the system while you are performing this procedure.  
This procedure requires an Hardware Management Console for pSeries (HMC)  
attached to the HMC port on the pSeries 690.  
This procedure runs the AIX online diagnostics in service mode on a full system  
partition.  
Does the system have AIX diagnostics preinstalled?  
YES  
NO  
Go to “Step 2. Loading the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode”.  
Go to “Step 2.5 Loading the Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM”  
on page 142.  
Step 2. Loading the Online Diagnostics in Service Mode  
To run the online diagnostics in service mode from the boot hard disk, do the following:  
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROM discs.  
3. Power off the managed system (refer to Full System Management Tasks in the IBM  
Hardware Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide).  
4. Use the HMC to power on the managed system in full system partition mode. Select  
the Power on Diagnostic Stored Boot List option (see the IBM Hardware  
Management Console for pSeries Installation and Operations Guide for more  
information about full system partitions).  
5. Enter any requested password.  
Note: If you are unable to load the diagnostics to the point when the DIAGNOSTIC  
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS display, call your support center for assistance.  
Go to step “Step 3. Running System Verification” on page 142.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 2.5 Loading the Standalone Diagnostics from CD-ROM  
To run standalone diagnostics in service mode from CD-ROM, do the following:  
1. Stop all programs including the AIX operating system (get help if needed).  
2. Remove all tapes, diskettes, and CD-ROMs.  
3. Power off the managed system (see the IBM Hardware Management Console for  
pSeries Installation and Operations Guide for more information about full system  
partitions).  
4. Use the HMC to power on the managed system in full system partition mode. Select  
the Power on Diagnostic Stored Boot List option (refer to Full System  
Management Tasks in the IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries  
Installation and Operations Guide).  
5. Insert the diagnostic media into the CD-ROM drive of the pSeries 690 (not into the  
HMC CD-ROM drive).  
6. Enter any requested passwords.  
Go to “Step 3. Running System Verification”.  
Step 3. Running System Verification  
When the Diagnostic Operating Instructions display, do the following to run system  
verification:  
1. Press Enter.  
2. If the terminal type is requested, you must use the Initialize Terminal option on the  
Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system before you can continue  
with the diagnostics. Select VT100 terminal emulation.  
3. Select the System Verification option on the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu.  
4. To run a general checkout of all installed resources, select the All Resource option  
on the Diagnostic Selection menu. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete  
the checkout procedure.  
To check one particular resource, select that resource on the Diagnostic Selection  
menu.  
The checkout program ends with either of the following results:  
v
v
The Testing Complete screen displays a message stating No trouble was found.  
The A Problem Was Detected On (Time Stamp) menu displays, with either a service  
request number (SRN) or an error code. Make a note of any codes displayed on the  
display or operator panel.  
To perform additional system verification, go to “Step 4. Performing Additional System  
Verification” on page 143. To exit diagnostics, go to “Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics”  
on page 143.  
142 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 4. Performing Additional System Verification  
To perform additional system verification, do the following:  
1. Press Enter to return to the Diagnostic Selection menu.  
2. To check other resources, select the resource. When you have checked all of the  
resources you need to check, go to “Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics”.  
Step 5. Stopping the Diagnostics  
To stop the diagnostics, do the following:  
1. To exit the diagnostics, press the F3 key (from a defined terminal) or press 99 (from  
an undefined terminal).  
2. If you changed any attributes on your ASCII terminal to run the diagnostics, change  
the settings back to normal.  
3. This completes the system verification. If you received an error code, record the  
code and report it to the service organization.  
If the server passed all the diagnostic tests, the verification process is complete and  
your server is ready to use.  
If you received an error code, record the code and go to the Eserver pSeries 690  
Service Guide.  
Chapter 7. Verifying the Hardware Operation 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
144 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination  
This chapter provides information on using standalone or online diagnostics to help you  
solve hardware problems.  
You may obtain more extensive problem isolation by running online diagnostics in  
service mode. This requires that the partition be rebooted (in a logical partitioned  
system) with no other users on that partition or that the system be rebooted (in a full  
system partition) with no other users on the system. Alternatively, if AIX online  
diagnostics are installed on the partition or system, you can run online diagnostics in  
concurrent mode. If the system or partition does not have AIX diagnostics installed, or if  
you cannot boot AIX or online diagnostics in service mode, run standalone diagnostics  
instead.  
Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics  
Use this procedure to obtain a service request number (SRN) when you load the  
standalone or online diagnostics. If you are unable to load the standalone or online  
diagnostics, go to “Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics” on  
page 151. The service organization uses the SRN to determine which field replaceable  
units (FRUs) are needed to restore the system to correct operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Note: See the IBM Hardware Management Console for pSeries Installation and  
Operations Guide to find the key sequences you need for your Hardware  
Management Console for pSeries (HMC) virtual terminal window to respond to  
the diagnostic programs.  
v
The diagnostics may be run within a virtual terminal window on the HMC connected  
to the system.  
v
v
This procedure requires that you select the type of diagnostics you want to run.  
Go to “Step 2”.  
Step 2  
Are the online diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 6” on page 147.  
Go to “Step 3” on page 146.  
YES  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 3  
Step 4  
Step 5  
Determine if the partition is accepting commands.  
Is the operating system accepting commands?  
NO  
If a partition is not accepting commands (or if the partition has an  
operating system other than AIX installed), run standalone  
diagnostics.  
YES  
Go to “Step 4”.  
Diagnostic tests can be run on many resources while the operating system is running.  
However, you can obtain more extensive problem isolation by running online  
diagnostics in service mode.  
Do you want to run the online diagnostics in service mode?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5”.  
YES  
Go to “Step 6” on page 147.  
This step starts the online diagnostics in concurrent mode.  
Note: The AIX operating system must be installed on the partition on which you want  
to run online diagnostics.  
1. Log in as root user or use CE Login.  
2. Enter the diag command.  
3. Wait until the diagnostic operating instructions display, or wait for three minutes.  
Are the diagnostic operating instructions displayed without any obvious console  
display problems?  
NO  
If the diagnostics operating instructions are not displayed on the  
partition, reboot that partition.  
Note: Do not turn off the system unit if the system is running one or  
more logical partitions.  
Go to “Step 6” on page 147.  
Go to “Step 9” on page 147.  
YES  
146 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 6  
This step loads online diagnostics in service mode.  
1. Reboot the system.  
2. At the SMS menu, press the numeric 6 key on the keyboard to indicate that  
diagnostics are to be loaded.  
3. Type the requested passwords.  
4. Follow instructions to select a console.  
Did the diagnostics operating instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7”.  
Go to “Step 9”.  
YES  
Step 7  
Locate your symptom in the following table, and perform the action listed in the Action  
column.  
Symptom  
Action  
Display problem  
All other symptoms  
Go to “Step 8”  
Go to “Problem Determination When Unable to  
Load Diagnostics” on page 151.  
Step 8  
Step 9  
This step analyzes a console display problem.  
Go to the problem-determination documentation for this type of terminal. For more  
information, refer to the Hardware Management Console for pSeries Maintenance  
Guide.  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Press Enter.  
Is the Function Selection menu displayed?  
NO  
Go to “Step 10” on page 148.  
Go to “Step 11” on page 148.  
YES  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 10  
Step 11  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Go to the problem-determination documentation for this type of terminal. For more  
information, refer to the Hardware Management Console for pSeries Maintenance  
Guide.  
1. If the terminal type has not been defined, use the Initialize Terminal option on the  
Function Selection menu to initialize the operating system environment before you  
can continue with the diagnostics. This is a separate and different operation from  
selecting the console display.  
2. Select Diagnostic Routines.  
3. Press Enter.  
4. In the following table, find the menu or system response you received when you  
selected Diagnostics. Perform the action listed in the Action column.  
System Response  
Action  
The Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is displayed.  
Select Problem Determination and go to “Step 12”  
on page 149.  
The Missing Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions until either the  
Diagnostic Mode Selection menu or an SRN is  
displayed.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is displayed,  
select Problem Determination and go to “Step 12” on  
page 149.  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step 14” on  
page 149.  
The New Resource menu is displayed.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
Note: Devices attached to serial ports S1 or S2 do  
not appear on the New Resource menu.  
If the Diagnostic Mode Selection menu is displayed,  
select Problem Determination and go to “Step 12” on  
page 149.  
If you get an SRN, record it, and go to “Step 14” on  
page 149.  
If you do not get an SRN, go to “Step 16” on  
page 150.  
The system does not respond to selecting  
Go to “Step 10”.  
diagnostics.  
148 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 12  
Did the Diagnostic Selection Menu display?  
NO  
If Problem Determination was selected from the Diagnostic Mode  
Selection menu, and if a recent error has been logged in the error log,  
the diagnostics automatically begin testing the resource.  
Follow the displayed instructions.  
v
v
v
If the No Trouble Found screen is displayed, press Enter.  
If another resource is tested, repeat this step.  
If the Diagnostic Selection menu is displayed, go to “Step 13”.  
If an SRN is displayed, record it, and go to “Step 14”.  
Go to “Step 13”.  
YES  
Step 13  
The All Resources option checks most of the configured adapters and devices.  
Select and run the diagnostic tests on the resources you are having problems with, or  
select the All Resources option to check all of the configured resources. Find the  
response in the following table and perform the action listed in the Action column.  
Diagnostic Response  
An SRN is displayed.  
The system hangs.  
Action  
Go to “Step 14”.  
Report SRN 109-200.  
Press Enter and continue with the testing.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No trouble was  
found message is displayed, and you have not tested  
all of the resources.  
The Testing Complete menu and the No trouble was  
found message displayed and you have tested all of  
the resources.  
Go to “Step 16” on page 150.  
Step 14  
The diagnostics produced an SRN for this problem. Do the following:  
1. Record the SRN.  
2. Report the SRN to the service organization.  
3. STOP. You have completed these procedures.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 15  
This step loads the standalone diagnostics.  
1. If you are running one or more logical partitions, reboot the partition.  
Note: Standalone diagnostics may be run with a CD-ROM or from a NIM server. If  
run from CD-ROM, the CD-ROM drive must be made available to the  
partition upon which you want to run standalone diagnostics. After this is  
done, go to step 2. If running from NIM, the NIM server must be set up to  
allow a diagnostic boot from that partition (both NIM server and client  
partition must have network adapters). For more information, see Chapter 5,  
“Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics” on page 83.  
2. Insert the diagnostic CD into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. When the keyboard POST indicator displays, press the numeric 5 key on the  
keyboard to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded.  
4. Type the requested passwords.  
5. Follow the instructions to select a console.  
Did the Diagnostics Operating Instructions display without any obvious display  
problem?  
NO  
Go to “Step 7” on page 147.  
Go to “Step 9” on page 147.  
YES  
Step 16  
The diagnostics did not detect a hardware problem. If you still have a problem, contact  
your service organization.  
150 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Problem Determination When Unable to Load Diagnostics  
Use the following procedure to obtain an error code. The service organization uses the  
error code to determine which field replaceable units (FRUs) are needed to restore the  
system to correct operation.  
Step 1. Considerations before Running This Procedure  
Go to “Step 2”.  
Step 2  
Are the online diagnostics installed on this system?  
NO  
Go to “Step 15” on page 150.  
Go to “Step 3”.  
YES  
Step 3  
This step attempts to load online diagnostics in service mode.  
1. Reboot the partition.  
2. If the keyboard POST indicator displays, press the numeric 6 key on the keyboard  
to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded from the hard disk.  
3. Type the requested passwords.  
4. Follow the instructions to select a console.  
5. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5” on page 152.  
Go to “Step 6” on page 154.  
YES  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 4  
This step attempts to load the standalone diagnostics.  
1. Reboot the partition.  
Note: Standalone diagnostics may be run with a CD-ROM or from a NIM server. If  
run from CD-ROM, the CD-ROM drive must be made available to the  
partition upon which you want to run standalone diagnostics. After this is  
done, go to step 2 on page 150. If running from NIM, the NIM server must be  
set up to allow a diagnostic boot from that partition (both NIM server and  
client partition must have network adapters). For more information, see  
Chapter 5, “Using the Online and Standalone Diagnostics” on page 83.  
2. Insert the diagnostic CD into the CD-ROM drive.  
3. If the keyboard POST indicator displays, press the numeric 5 key on the keyboard  
to indicate that diagnostics are to be loaded from CD-ROM.  
4. Type the requested passwords.  
5. Follow the instructions to select a console.  
6. Wait until the diagnostics load or the system appears to stop.  
Did the diagnostics load?  
NO  
Go to “Step 5”.  
YES  
Go to “Step 6” on page 154.  
Step 5  
Starting at the top of the following table, locate your symptom and perform the action  
listed in the Action column.  
Symptom  
Action  
The power LED does not come on, or comes on and  
does not stay on.  
Check the power cable to the outlet. Check the circuit  
breakers and check for power at the outlet.  
Ensure that the room temperature is within 60 - 90°F.  
If you do not find a problem, record error code  
M0PS0000 and report the problem to the service  
organization.  
The diagnostics are loaded and there was no beep  
heard from the system unit during the IPL sequence.  
Record error code M0SPK001.  
The system stops with the diagnostic operating  
instructions displayed.  
Go to “Step 6” on page 154.  
The system stops with a prompt to enter a password.  
Enter the password. You are not allowed to continue  
until a correct password has been entered. When you  
have entered a valid password, wait for one of the  
other conditions to occur.  
The system stops with a three-, four- or eight-digit  
error code(s) displayed on the console.  
Record the error code(s) and report the problem to the  
service organization.  
152 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Symptom  
Action  
The system login prompt is displayed.  
You may not have pressed the correct key or you may  
not have pressed the key soon enough when you  
were to indicate a service mode boot of diagnostic  
programs. If this was the case, start over at the  
beginning of this step.  
If you are sure that you pressed the correct key in a  
timely manner, go to “Step 7” on page 154.  
The system does not respond when the password is  
entered.  
Go to “Step 7” on page 154.  
The system stopped and an indicator is displayed on  
the system console and an eight-digit error code is not  
displayed.  
If the indicator represents:  
v
v
v
v
v
A keyboard: record error code M0KBD000 and  
report the problem to the service organization.  
Memory: record error code M0MEM002 and report  
the problem to the service organization.  
SCSI: record error code M0CON000 and report the  
problem to the service organization.  
Network: record error code M0NET000 and report  
the problem to the service organization.  
Speaker/audio: record error code M0BT0000 and  
report the problem to the service organization.  
The System Management Services menu is displayed. The device or media that you are attempting to boot  
from might be faulty.  
1. Check the SMS error log for any errors. To check  
the error log:  
v
v
v
v
Select tools.  
Select error log.  
If an error is logged, check the time stamp.  
If the error was logged during the current boot  
attempt, record it and report it to your service  
representative.  
v
If no recent error is logged in the error log,  
continue to the next step.  
2. If you are attempting to load the online  
diagnostics, try loading the standalone diagnostics.  
Otherwise, record error code M0SCSI01 and  
report to the service organization.  
The system appears to be stopped, the disk activity  
light is on continuously, and a beep was heard from  
the system unit.  
Record error code M0MEM001 and report the problem  
to the service organization.  
The system stops and the message STARTING  
SOFTWARE PLEASE WAIT ... is displayed.  
Report error code M0BT0000.  
Report error code M0SCSI01.  
The message The system will now continue the  
boot process is displayed continuously on the system  
unit’s console.  
Chapter 8. Hardware Problem Determination 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6  
Step 7  
The diagnostics loaded correctly.  
Go to “Problem Determination Using the Standalone or Online Diagnostics” on  
page 145.  
There is a problem with the keyboard.  
Go to the problem-determination documentation for this type of terminal. For more  
information, refer to the Hardware Management Console for pSeries Maintenance  
Guide.  
154 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A. Environmental Notices  
Product Recycling and Disposal  
This unit contains materials such as circuit boards, cables, electromagnetic compatibility  
gaskets and connectors which may contain lead and copper/beryllium alloys that require  
special handling and disposal at end of life. Before this unit is disposed of, these  
materials must be removed and recycled or discarded according to applicable  
regulations. IBM offers product return programs in several countries, for country specific  
instructions please refer to the following web site:  
http://www.ibm.com/ibm/environment/products/prp.phtml  
This product may contain a sealed lead acid battery(s) or nickel-cadmium battery(s).  
The battery(s) must be recycled or disposed of properly. Recycling facilities may not be  
available in your area. In the United States, IBM has established a collection process  
for reuse, recycling, or proper disposal of used sealed lead acid, nickel cadmium and  
nickel metal hydride batteries and battery packs from IBM equipment. For information  
on proper disposal of the batteries in this product, please contact IBM at  
1-800-426-4333. For information on disposal of sealed lead acid or nickel cadmium  
batteries outside the United States, contact your local waste disposal or recycling  
facility.  
Environmental Design  
The environmental efforts that have gone into the design of this system signify IBM’s  
commitment to improve the quality of its products and processes. Some of these  
accomplishments include the elimination of the use of Class 1 ozone-depleting  
chemicals in the manufacturing process and reductions in manufacturing wastes. For  
more information, contact an IBM account representative.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Acoustical Noise Emissions  
The equivalent continuous A-weighted sound pressure level at workstations (emission  
sound pressure level at the 1-meter bystander positions) does not exceed 70 dB(A).  
Der Geräuschpegel der Einheit ist kleiner oder gleich 70 db(A).  
Declared Acoustical Noise Emissions  
Acoustical Characteristic  
Product Configuration  
Declared A-Weighted Sound  
Power Level, LWAd (B)  
Declared A-Weighted Sound  
Pressure Level, LpAm (dB)  
Operating  
7.5  
Idle  
7.5  
7.9  
Operating  
Idle  
57  
7040 Acoustical Doors  
7040 Slimline Doors  
57  
62  
7.9  
62  
Notes:  
1. Noise levels cited are for the typical configuration (A-Frame: Bulk Power, CEC cage, battery  
option, media drawer, and two I/O drawers).  
2. The 0.6-B (6-dB) reduction in noise emission levels with the acoustical rear door corresponds  
to a factor of 4 reduction. That is, the noise level of a single A-Frame with thin covers is about  
the same as the noise level of four A-Frames with acoustical covers.  
3. LWAd is the upper-limit A-weighted sound power level; LpAm is the mean A-weighted sound  
pressure level at the 1-meter bystander positions; 1 B = 10 dB.  
4. All measurements made in conformance with ISO 7779 and declared in conformance with  
ISO 9296.  
156 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix B. Notices  
This information was developed for products and services offered in the U.S.A.  
The manufacturer may not offer the products, services, or features discussed in this  
document in other countries. Consult the manufacturer’s representative for information  
on the products and services currently available in your area. Any reference to the  
manufacturer’s product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only  
that product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product,  
program, or service that does not infringe any intellectual property right of the  
manufacturer may be used instead. However, it is the user’s responsibility to evaluate  
and verify the operation of any product, program, or service.  
The manufacturer may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject  
matter described in this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you  
any license to these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the  
manufacturer.  
The following paragraph does not apply to the United Kingdom or any country  
where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: THIS MANUAL IS  
PROVIDED ″AS IS″ WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR  
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR  
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in  
certain transactions; therefore, this statement may not apply to you.  
This information could include technical inaccuracies or typographical errors. Changes  
are periodically made to the information herein; these changes will be incorporated in  
new editions of the publication. The manufacturer may make improvements and/or  
changes in the product(s) and/or the program(s) described in this publication at any  
time without notice.  
Information concerning products made by other than the manufacturer was obtained  
from the suppliers of those products, their published announcements, or other publicly  
available sources. The manufacturer has not tested those products and cannot confirm  
the accuracy of performance, compatibility or any other claims related to products made  
by other than the manufacturer. Questions on the capabilities of products made by other  
than the manufacturer should be addressed to the suppliers of those products.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
158 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test  
Attention: This procedure applies to modems attached to the serial ports (S1 and S2)  
on the primary I/O book (location U1.18-P1-H2). It does not affect the operation of the  
modem attached to the Hardware Management Console for pSeries (HMC).  
The call-out function is normally handled by the Service Focal Point running on the  
HMC.  
For your convenience, an example of a basic service processor setup checklist is  
included here. Your setup may include more or fewer of the available features, so you  
can adjust this checklist for your own application.  
Note: The call-out and surveillance options are disabled in partitioned systems.  
Service Processor Setup Checklist  
1. Shut down the managed system, and wait for the OK in the physical operator panel.  
2. Open a virtual terminal window on the HMC.  
3. Start the service processor menus.  
4. Set the system name.  
5. Enable Surveillance.  
6. Configure call-in/call-out.  
7. Attach modems if necessary. If modem attachment is not necessary, proceed to  
step 8. To attach a modem, do the following:  
a. Exit the service processor menus.  
b. Disable the 350 V dc outputs from the BPA by placing the UEPO switch in the  
off position.  
Attention: With the UEPO off, power is still present within the BPA .  
c. Place the UEPO switch in the on position.  
d. Proceed to step 8.  
8. Test both of the following:  
v
Call-In, page “Testing Call-In” on page 160  
Call-Out, page “Testing Call-Out” on page 161  
v
9. Use the “Save or Restore Hardware Management Policies,” in the “Introduction to  
Tasks and Service Aids” section of the RS/6000 and Eserver Diagnostic  
Information for Multiple Bus Systems to back up the service processor settings.  
Note: This action is strongly recommended to protect the usefulness of the service  
processor and the availability of the server.  
Your service processor is now ready for use.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Testing the Setup  
This section contains sample testing procedures to help ensure your setup is working.  
These tests include communicating with the server operating system. Before you start,  
ensure that the necessary serial port(s) is configured. If you need assistance, refer to  
“Serial Port Configuration” on page 161.  
The server should be powered off as a result of the “Service Processor Setup  
Checklist” on page 159.  
Testing Call-In  
1. At your remote terminal, call in to your server. Your server answers and offers you  
the service processor Main Menu after requesting your privileged-access password.  
2. Select System Power Control.  
3. Select Power-On System.  
When you are asked if you wish to continue powering on the system, type Y.  
4. After the system firmware and operating system have initialized the server, the login  
prompt displays at your remote terminal if you set up seamless modem transfer.  
This may take several minutes. When the login prompt displays, you have  
successfully called the service processor.  
5. Type logout to disconnect from the operating system. The message No Carrier  
displays on your remote terminal.  
6. Call your server again. The operating system answers and offers you the login  
prompt. If these tests are successful, call-in is working.  
7. Log in and type shutdown -F to shut down your server.  
8. The message No Carrier displays on your remote terminal.  
160 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Testing Call-Out  
During the setup, you entered your phone numbers for the pager and customer voice.  
These numbers are used for this test.  
1. Your remote terminal is disconnected as a result of the Call-In test.  
2. Call your server again.  
3. At the service processor Main Menu, select Call-In/Call-Out Setup menu, then  
select Call-Out test. This action causes a simulated error condition for the purposes  
of this test.  
4. After a few moments, a message displays, regarding an illegal entry. Press Enter to  
clear the message and return to the main menu.  
5. When your telephone rings, answer the call. You should hear the sound of a  
telephone being dialed. This is your computer trying to page you.  
If this test is successful, call-out is working correctly.  
Serial Port Configuration  
To configure the serial port on an AIX system, run the following from an AIX console:  
1. Log in as root user.  
2. To determine if you have any serial ports already configured, type:  
lsdev -Cc tty  
If no serial ports are configured, none are listed. If you want to configure serial  
ports that are not listed, continue with the remaining steps.  
3. Identify the serial port(s) with the modem(s).  
4. Type smit tty  
5. Select add tty  
6. Select RS232  
7. Select Baud rate 9600 or higher.  
8. Select login enable and set the flow control to RTS.  
9. Commit the selections and set up any other needed serial ports.  
10. Exit SMIT.  
Appendix C. Service Processor Setup and Test 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
162 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations  
Note: This appendix applies only to modems attached to the serial ports (S1 and S2)  
on the primary I/O book (location U1.18-P1-H2).  
These configuration files do not apply to the modem attached to the Hardware  
Management Console for pSeries (HMC).  
Sample Modem Configuration Files  
This appendix contains information about several sample modem configuration files that  
either work directly with your modem or provide a good starting point for a custom  
setup.  
The sample modem configuration files are located in the firmware in  
/usr/share/modems subdirectory (if your server is using AIX) with the following names.  
A listing of each specific file is included in this appendix.  
Generic Modem Configuration Files  
AIX File Name  
Service Processor Firmware File Name  
modem_z_sp  
modem_z.cfg  
modem_z0.cfg  
modem_f.cfg  
modem_f0.cfg  
modem_f1.cfg  
modem_z0_sp  
modem_f_sp  
modem_f0_sp  
modem_f1_sp  
Specific Modem Configuration Files  
AIX File Name  
modem_m0.cfg  
modem_m1.cfg  
Service Processor Firmware File Name  
modem_m0_sp  
modem_m1_sp  
Use the following selection procedures and your modem manual to determine which of  
the configuration files is suitable for your use.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuration File Selection  
Use the following steps to select a configuration file:  
1. Is your modem an IBM 7852-400?  
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m0.cfg and go to step 7 on page 165.  
Note: The IBM 7852-400 modem has DIP switches on the right side of the unit.  
See “IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings” on page 166 for the correct switch  
settings.  
If No, continue with step 2.  
2. Is your modem an IBM 7857-017?  
If Yes, use modem configuration file modem_m1.cfg and go to step 7 on page 165.  
Note: The IBM 7857-017 modem has two telephone line connections on the back  
of the unit. One is marked LL (for Leased Line), and the other is marked  
PTSN (for Public Telephone Switched Network). The service processor  
expects to use the modem on the public network, so the telephone line  
should attach to the PTSN connector.  
If No, continue with step 3.  
3. Does your modem respond to the extended command set (prefixed with &)?  
If Yes, go to step 5. If No, continue with step 4.  
4. Does your modem respond to:  
v
ATZ reset command  
or  
v
ATZn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on?  
If ATZ, configuration file modem_z.cfg is recommended. If ATZn, configuration  
file modem_z0.cfg is recommended.  
Go to step 7 on page 165.  
5. Does your modem command set include a test for V.42 error correction at the  
remote modem (often called “Auto-Reliable Mode”)?  
If Yes, disable this test. You can use sample configuration files  
/usr/share/modem_m0.cfg or /usr/share/modem_m1.cfg as models to help you  
create a file for your particular modem. See “Customizing the Modem Configuration  
Files” on page 166 for more information. Go to step 7 on page 165.  
If No, go to step 6.  
6. Does your modem respond to:  
v
AT&F reset command  
or  
v
AT&Fn reset commands, where n can be 0, 1, and so on?  
If AT&F, configuration file modem_f.cfg is recommended. If AT&Fn, configuration  
file modem_f0.cfg or modem_f1.cfg is recommended, depending on which  
provides the hardware flow control profile.  
164 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. You have completed selection of the configuration file.  
If your modem configuration selection is not available in the Service Processor  
Modem Configuration Menu, you must access it through the Configure Remote  
Maintenance Policy Service Aid.  
If you find it necessary to adjust any of these configuration files, use the manual  
provided with your modem to accomplish that task. It is recommended you select  
settings that enable hardware flow control and respond to DTR.  
Note: Some older modems do not respond to the X0 or &R1 commands. Edit out  
these commands from the modem configuration file if yours is such a  
modem. See your modem manual for more information.  
Some modems, such as the IBM 7857-017, are not designed for the paging function.  
Although they can be used for paging, they return an error message when they do not  
get the expected response from another modem. Therefore, even though the paging  
was successful, the error message causes the service processor to retry, continuing to  
place pager calls for the number of retries specified in the Call-Out Policy Setup Menu.  
These retries result in redundant pages.  
Examples for Using the Generic Sample Modem Configuration Files  
The following table contains information to help you determine which modem  
configuration file to use with various modems.  
Modem  
Setup Z  
Setup Z0  
(Rare)  
Setup F  
Setup F0  
Setup F1  
AT&T DataPort 2001  
(Ring interrupt only on  
first ring)  
X
Bocamodem 1440E  
X
Hayes Smart Modem  
300  
X
IBM 5841  
IBM 5843  
IBM 7851  
IBM 7852-10  
IBM 7855  
X
X
X
X
X
X
USRobotics 36.6K  
Sportster  
Zoom V.32  
X
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Customizing the Modem Configuration Files  
You can create your own modem configuration files or modify the samples provided.  
After you customize your modem configuration files, you must access them through the  
Configure Remote Maintenance Policy Service Aid rather than from the service  
processor menus.  
If you have already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations, and telephone  
numbers from the service processor menus, use the service aid to specify your  
customized modem configuration files.  
If you have not already set up your serial ports, line speeds, authorizations, and  
telephone numbers from the service processor menus, use the service aids to set them  
while you specify your customized modem configuration files.  
To disable Auto-Reliable Mode testing of the remote modem, use the sample modem  
configuration file /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg as a model that you can modify, as  
follows:  
1. Find the necessary command in your modem manual.  
2. Copy the /usr/share/modems/modem_f.cfg file to a new file with a different name  
(for example, modem_fx.cfg).  
3. In the new file (modem_fx.cfg), change the line Send "ATE0T\r" to Send  
"ATcccE0T\r" where ccc is the added command as specified in your modem  
manual, as follows.  
Change the third line of each of the following stanzas:  
v
v
v
condout  
condin  
ripo  
4. Save the changes.  
IBM 7852-400 DIP Switch Settings  
If you are using a 7852-400 modem to enable service processor communications, for  
proper operation, the dual inline package (DIP) switches must be set according to the  
following table:  
Switch  
Position  
Function  
1
2
Up  
Up  
Force DTR  
Flow Control &E4  
3
Down  
Down  
Up  
Result Codes Enabled  
4
Modem Emulation Disabled  
Auto Answer Enabled  
5
6
Up  
Maximum Throughput Enabled  
RTS Normal Functions  
7
Up  
8
Down  
Down  
Up  
Enable Command Mode  
Remote Digital Loopback Test Enabled  
Dial-Up Line Enabled  
9
10  
11  
12  
*Up  
AT Responses Enabled (Extended Responses Disabled)  
Asynchronous Operation  
*Down  
166 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switch  
Position  
Function  
13  
14  
UP  
Up  
28.8KB Line Speed  
15  
16  
Up  
Up  
CD and DSR Normal Functions  
2-Wire Leased Line Enabled  
* Only switches 11 and 12 are changed from the factory default settings.  
Xon/Xoff Modems  
Some early modems assume software flow control (Xon/Xoff) between the computer  
and the modem. Modems with this design send extra characters during and after the  
transmitted data. The service processor cannot accept these extra characters. If your  
configuration includes such a modem, your functional results may be unpredictable.  
The sample modem configuration files included in this appendix do not support these  
modems, so custom configuration files are necessary. Anchor Automation 2400E is an  
example of such a modem.  
If you experience unexplainable performance problems that may be due to Xon/Xoff  
characters, it is recommended that you upgrade your modem.  
Ring Detection  
Most modems produce an interrupt request each time they detect a ring signal. Some  
modems generate an interrupt only on the first ring signal that they receive. AT&T  
DataPort 2001 is an example of such a modem.  
The service processor uses the ring interrupt request to count the number of rings when  
Ring Indicate Power-On (RIPO) is enabled. If your modem produces an interrupt on  
only the first ring, set Ring Indicate Power-On to start on the first ring. Otherwise, you  
can choose to start Ring Indicate Power-On on any ring count.  
Terminal Emulators  
The service processor is compatible with simple ASCII terminals, and therefore  
compatible with most emulators. When a remote session is handed off from the service  
processor to the operating system, agreement between terminal emulators becomes  
important.  
The server’s operating system will have some built-in terminal emulators. You may also  
have a commercially available terminal emulation. It is important that the local and host  
computers select the same or compatible terminal emulators so that the key  
assignments and responses match, ensuring successful communications and control.  
For best formatting, choose line wrap in your terminal emulator setup.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recovery Procedures  
Situations such as line noises and power surges can sometimes cause your modem to  
enter an undefined state. When it is being used for dial-in, dial-out or ring indicate  
power-on, your modem is initialized each time one of these actions is expected. If one  
of these environmental conditions occur after your modem has been initialized, it might  
be necessary to recover your modem to a known state.  
If your modem communicates correctly with remote users, it is probably in control. It  
may be wise to occasionally change some of the functional settings and then change  
them back, just for the sense of security that the modem is communicating, and to  
ensure it has been initialized recently.  
If your system is particularly difficult to access physically, another strategy is to protect it  
with an Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) and a phone-line surge protector.  
In case recovery becomes necessary, shut down your system using established  
procedures. Disconnect the power cable and press the power button to drain  
capacitance while power is disconnected. Disconnect and reconnect modem power, and  
then reconnect system power to completely reinitialize your system.  
168 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Transfer of a Modem Session  
Because many modem command variations exist, the sample modem configuration files  
located at the end of this appendix have been written to capture the largest number of  
workable modem settings.  
The modem command &Dn (where n is a number) generally sets the modem response  
to the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal from the server’s serial port. The desired  
response is that the modem will hold a connection while DTR is enabled, and drop the  
connection when DTR is released. Using this mechanism, the server hangs up on a  
connection under normal conditions.  
Consult your modem manual for its specific response scheme for the &Dn command.  
Two strategies are available for dealing with the modem’s response to DTR:  
v
v
Recovery  
Prevention  
Before you use one of these strategies, determine if your server’s modem is set up  
correctly to respond to DTR.  
With the remote terminal connected to serial port 1 and defined as the Primary Console  
Device, there are two tests you can perform:  
1. Will the modem drop the connection after the System initialization complete  
message displays at the remote terminal?  
If Yes, the modem is set up correctly.  
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your modem manual  
for this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the  
sample modem configuration files, as follows:  
2. Will the server’s modem disconnect when the power drops? You can make this  
observation at the remote terminal by commanding your server to shut down and  
power off. (Use the AIX command shutdown -F.) Watch for the message NO  
CARRIER on your remote terminal.  
If Yes, this is the correct response. The modem is set up correctly.  
If No, try another &Dn setting for your server’s modem. See your model manual for  
this information. The &Dn command appears in three places each in three of the  
sample modem configuration files. Only the following sample modem configuration  
files contain the &Dn command (in three places each):  
v
v
v
modem_f.cfg  
modem_f0.cfg  
modem_f1.cfg  
If you are using modem_z.cfg or modem_z0.cfg, you cannot control DTR response.  
If your remote terminal does not disconnect after logging off, you must command  
the remote terminal emulator to hang up. This then breaks the connection.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recovery Strategy  
The recovery strategy consists of making two calls to establish a remote session. This  
solution is the easiest to implement and allows more freedom for configuring your  
server’s serial ports.  
To set up a remote terminal session, dial into the service processor and start the  
system. After the operating system is loaded and initialized, the connection will be  
dropped. At this point, call the server back and the operating system will answer and  
offer you the login prompt.  
Prevention Strategy  
The disconnect is caused by the operating system when it initializes the Primary  
Console. The tests listed in “Transfer of a Modem Session” on page 169 are conducted  
with the remote terminal selected as the primary console to manifest the modem’s  
response to DTR transitions.  
v
If a local ASCII terminal or a graphics console is to be a permanent part of your  
server, then make one of them the primary console. Your remote terminal will no  
longer experience the connection loss.  
v
If a local console is not a permanent part of your server, you can still assign either  
the unused graphics console or the unused serial port as the primary console. This  
gives you the desired seamless connection at your remote terminal.If you choose to  
use the unused serial port as the primary console, some initialization traffic will be  
sent to any serial device attached to that port. As a result, that serial device’s  
connection and function could be affected. These impacts may make that port  
unattractive for devices other than a temporary local ASCII terminal.  
170 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modem Configuration Sample Files  
Sample File modem_m0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP: modem_m0  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file specifically for IBM 7852-400  
#
#
#
#
modem with Auto-Reliable feature. This feature must be turned off  
for Catcher calls. This example uses the AT&F reset command to  
choose the factory defaults.  
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# The modem has configuration switches. They should be set to the  
# factory default settings, except switches 11 and 12. These must be  
# to UP ("AT" responses) and DOWN (Asynchronous operation), respectively.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%R Return phone number  
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F&E2E0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults  
# Reliable mode  
# Echo off  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT&E12&E14\r"  
# Disable pacing  
# Disable data compression  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r"  
# DSR independent of CD  
# Force DSR on.  
# CD respond time=100ms  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
send "ATV0S0=0\r"  
# Numeric response code  
# Auto-Answer off  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
done  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or  
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or  
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
send "+++"  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F&E2E0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
# Reliable mode  
# Echo off  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT&E12&E14\r"  
# Disable pacing  
# Disable data compression  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful  
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r"  
# DSR independent of CD.  
# Force DSR on.  
# CD respond time=100ms  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
send "ATV0S0=2\r"  
# Numberic response code  
# Answer on 2nd ring  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
waitcall:  
ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pickup 2nd ring or timeout  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "33\r" or "31\r" or "28\r" or "26\r" or "24\r" or "21\r" or  
"19\r" or "13\r" or "12\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm successful command.  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F&E2E0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
# Reliable mode  
# Echo off  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT&E12&E14\r"  
# Disable pacing  
# Disable data compression  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.  
send "AT&SF1&S0S9=1\r"  
# DSR independent of CD.  
# Force DSR on.  
# CD respond time=100ms  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
send "ATV0S0=0\r"  
# Numeric response code  
# Auto Answer OFF  
# Confirm commands successful.  
#
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
# responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
172 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_m1.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP modem_m1  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file specifically for IBM 7857-017 modem with  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
Auto-Reliable feature. This feature must be turned off for Catcher calls.  
This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
To allow dial commands for digital pagers, it is necessary to reduce  
the number of characters in the dial command. Each comma (delay) has  
been set to 6 seconds (S8=6) for that reason.  
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%R Return phone number  
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F*E0E0\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
# *E0=data compression disabled  
# E0=echo disabled  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT#F0*Q2S8=6\r"  
# Trellis modulation disabled  
# Retrain with adaptive rate  
# Set ,=6second  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful  
send "ATV0X0S0=0\r"  
# Numeric response code  
# AT compatible messages  
# Auto-Answer disabled  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful.  
done  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
expect "1\r" busy "7\r" timeout 60 # Expect a connection response.  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
expect "1\r" busy "7\r" timeout 60 # Expect a connection response.  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F*E0E0\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
# *E0=data compression disabled  
# E0=echo disabled  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT#F0*Q2\r"  
# Trellis modulation disabled  
# Retrain with adaptive rate  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm commands successful  
send "ATV0X0S0=2\r"  
# Numeric response code  
# AT compatible messages  
# Answer on 2nd ring  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
waitcall:  
ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "1\r" timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATD%N,%R\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# commas=6sec wait time to  
#
enter paging number.  
# %R = return number  
expect "0\r" or "3\r" timeout 30  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
send "ATH0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm successful command.  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F*E0E0\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
# *E0=data compression disabled  
# E0=echo disabled  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "AT#F0*Q2\r"  
# Trellis modulation disabled  
# Retrain with adaptive rate  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Confirm successful command.  
send "ATV0X0S0=0\r"  
# Numeric response code  
# AT compatible messages  
# Auto-Answer disabled  
# Confirm commands successful.  
#
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
174 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_z.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many early Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the ATZ reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This setup will work for many modems, but it is required for early vintage  
modems which respond to neither the ATZ0 reset command nor the extended (&)  
commands. Refer to your modem manual.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Z
Reset to factory defaults Q0 Turn on responses  
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
Q1 Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode  
S0=2 Answer on second ring  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
timeout 60  
disconnect:  
done  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
176 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_z0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP Z0  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for some early Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the ATZ0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This setup is recommended for modems that will respond to the ATZ0 command  
and which do not respond to the extended (&) commands. Refer to your modem  
manual.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
Z0 Reset. Restore Profile 0 Q0 Turn on responses  
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Q1 Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring  
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "ATZ0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
178 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to  
the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), setup file  
F0 or F1 is recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
#
#
#
AT Attention Code  
&F Reset to default profile Q0 Turn on responses  
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Q1 Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
# &C1 Detect CD  
#
#
#
#
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
%P Paging phone number  
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
ripo:  
error:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
send "AT&FQ0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
send "ATE0T\r"  
# Reset to factory defaults.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR.  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
# Handle unexpected modem  
180 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f0.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F0  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F0 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is preferred for modems with extended (&) commands. For early  
vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is recommended. If your modem responds to  
the extended (&) commands and to factory default choices (&Fn), but doesn’t  
work properly with this setup file, setup F1 is recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
AT Attention Code  
# &F0 Reset. Restore profile 0 Q0  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
Turn on responses  
#
#
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
Q1 Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
# &C1 Detect CD  
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
182 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
retry:  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F0Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 0  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
# Confirm command successful.  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
done  
# RI Power On enabled.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
#
responses.  
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
184 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sample File modem_f1.cfg  
#
# COMPONENT_NAME: (ESPSETUP) ENTRY SERVICE PROCESSOR SETUP F1  
#
# FUNCTIONS: Modem configuration file for many recent Hayes* compatible modems.  
#
#
#
#
#
This example uses the AT&F1 reset command to choose the factory defaults.  
This set up is for modems with extended (&) commands and which do not work  
properly with setup F0. For early vintage modems, setup Z or Z0 is  
recommended.  
# * Trademark of Hayes Microcomputer Products, Inc.  
#
# (C) COPYRIGHT International Business Machines Corp. 1996  
# All Rights Reserved  
# Licensed Materials - Property of IBM  
#
# US Government Users Restricted Rights - Use, duplication or  
# disclosure restricted by GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
#
#
# If the modem has configuration switches, they should be set to the  
# factory default settings.  
ICDelay 1  
DefaultTO 10  
CallDelay 120  
#
AT Attention Code  
,
Inserts delay in dialing commands  
# &F1 Reset. Restore profile 1 Q0 Turn on responses  
#
#
E0 Turn echo off  
V0 Use numeric responses  
Q1 Turn off responses  
S0=0 Automatic answer inhibit  
# +++ Escape to command mode S0=2 Answer on second ring  
#
#
#
#
#
H0 Hang-up  
X0=0 Limit modem response codes  
T = Tone mode. When used as T\r, it is a  
no op to maintain program synchronization  
when modem may/will echo the commands.  
# &C1 Detect CD  
&D2 Respond to DTR (often the default)  
# &R1 Ignore RTS (CTS)  
#
#
#
#
%N Call-Out phone number  
%S Modem speed (available to users)  
%P Paging phone number  
# Following are common responses from a wide range of modems:  
# 16, 15, 12, 10, 5 and 1 are connection responses. Add others as required.  
# 7=busy; 6=no dial tone; 4=error; 3=no carrier; 2=ring; 0=OK  
#
# PROGRAMMING NOTE: No blanks between double quote marks (").  
condout:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
connect:  
send "ATDT%N\r"  
# Tone dialing command.  
# %N from Call Home setup.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
timeout 60  
retry:  
done  
send "A/"  
# Repeat the previous command.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r" busy "7\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
disconnect:  
delay 2  
send "+++"  
delay 2  
# Separate from previous data.  
# Assure command mode.  
# Allow mode switching delay.  
# Set modem switch-hook down  
send "ATH0T\r"  
#
(i.e., hang up).  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r" timeout 2  
send "ATE0Q1\r"  
# Ignore modem response.  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
Disable responses.  
ignore "0\r" timeout 1  
done  
condin:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=2\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer ON  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
waitcall: ignore "2\r" timeout 1  
expect "2\r" timeout 10  
# Ignore first ring.  
# Pick up second ring  
#
or timeout.  
# Expect a connection response.  
expect "16\r" or "15\r" or "14\r" or "12\r" or "10\r" or "5\r" or "1\r"  
timeout 60  
done  
page:  
send "ATDT%N,,,,%R;\r"  
# %N = pager call center number  
# Add enough commas to wait for  
#
time to enter paging number.  
# %R = paging number  
# Confirm successful command.  
expect "0\r" timeout 60  
delay 2  
send "ATH0T\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Wait before hanging up.  
# Hang up.  
# Confirm successful command.  
ripo:  
send "AT&F1Q0T\r"  
ignore "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2 # Ignore modem response.  
# Reset modem. Select profile 1  
send "ATE0T\r"  
expect "0\r" or "OK\r\n" timeout 2  
send "ATQ0V0X0T\r"  
# Initialize modem: Echo OFF,  
#
#
Enable responses (Numeric),  
Limit response codes.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "ATS0=0\r"  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
send "AT&C1&D2&R1\r"  
# Confirm commands successful.  
# Set AutoAnswer OFF  
# Confirm command successful.  
# Detect carrier and DTR,  
#
Ignore RTS.  
expect "0\r" timeout 2  
done  
# Confirm command successful.  
# RI Power On enabled.  
186 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
error:  
# Handle unexpected modem  
responses.  
#
expect "8\r" or "7\r" or "6\r" or "4\r" or "3\r"  
delay 2  
done  
Appendix D. Modem Configurations 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
188 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
customer account setup menu 50  
customizing files  
Numerics  
7135 RAIDiant array 137  
7318 server service aid 139  
modem  
configuration 166  
A
D
about this book xiii  
acoustical  
deconfigure  
memory 55  
processor 55  
noise  
emissions 156  
activating process  
processor on demand  
activation features  
processor on demand  
alter/display bootlist 109  
diagdetrto command 111  
diaggetrto command 110  
diagnostic run-time  
change 111  
8
5
display 110  
diagnostics  
considerations 83  
loading 89  
online 141  
standalone 142  
online 85  
concurrent mode 86  
maintenance mode 87  
problem determination  
loading 151  
B
battery  
disposal, recycling 155  
boot mode menu 31  
BPA  
2
bulk power assembly  
2
C
call-in  
running  
testing 160  
service mode 85  
running online 84  
service mode 85  
standalone 88  
considerations 89  
NIM server 89  
partition considerations 88  
stopping 143  
call-in/call-out setup menu 44  
call-out  
testing 161  
call-out (call-home) 58  
call-out policy setup menu 49  
capacity planning  
processor on demand  
6
change diagnostic run-time 111  
configuration  
using 83  
display diagnostic run-time 110  
display fault indicators 118  
display identify indicators 126  
display/alter bootlist 109  
drawers  
client 91  
modem  
customizing files 166  
file selection 164  
sample files 163  
specific files 163  
NIM server 90  
service processor  
serial port 161  
I/O  
3
operator panel display 11  
media  
2
dynamic processor sparing  
7
system  
configurations  
modem 163  
configure  
memory 55  
processor 55  
configure scan dump policy 105  
console mirroring 59  
enable/disable 23  
2
E
electronic service agent  
environmental  
7
design 155  
notices 155  
error logs  
service processor 60  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
log repair action service aid 127  
F
fault indicators 118  
fibre channel RAID service aids 119  
file selection  
M
media drawer  
2
media subsystem operator panel locations 11  
memory  
configure 55  
deconfigure 55  
memory configuration/deconfiguration menu 35, 36  
menu  
modem  
configuration 164  
firmware  
open  
entering 14  
flash SK-NET FDDI firmware 119  
boot mode 31  
call-in/call-out 44  
G
call-out policy setup 49  
customer account setup 50  
general  
general user menu 17  
graphics console  
support 10  
user 17  
language selection 42  
LED indicator 38  
main 19  
memory configuration/deconfiguration 35  
modem configuration 45  
OS surveillance  
setup 24  
power control network utilities 37  
privileged  
H
hardware  
problem determination 145  
hardware operation  
considerations 141  
verifying 141  
HMC 2, 3  
overview and setup  
power-off  
service processor 10  
power-on  
service processor 10  
9
user 19  
processor configuration/deconfiguration 33  
reboot/restart policy setup 29  
ring indicate 28  
serial port selection 46  
serial port speed setup 47  
setup 21  
I
IBF  
2
identify indicators 126  
indicators  
system information 32  
system power control 27  
telephone setup 47  
modem  
fault 118  
POST 13  
internal battery feature  
introducing the system  
2
1
configuration  
customizing files 166  
file selection 164  
sample files 163  
K
keys  
specific files 163  
numeric 1 key 13  
numeric 5 13  
numeric 6 14  
numeric 8 key 14  
configurations 163  
modem session  
transfer 169  
modem_f.cfg, sample file 179  
modem_f0.cfg, sample file 182  
modem_f1.cfg, sample file 185  
modem_z.cfg, sample file 175  
modem_z0.cfg, sample file 177  
L
language selection menu 42  
laser compliance statement  
laser safety information  
x
x
LCD progress indicator log 61  
LED  
N
network service aid 127  
NIM server  
indicator  
menu 38  
configuration 90  
client 91  
LED status 11  
local area network service aid 127  
190 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NIM server (continued)  
standalone diagnostics 89  
noise emissions  
acoustical 156  
notices  
preface xiii  
primary console 170  
privileged user menus 19  
problem determination  
diagnostics  
environmental 155  
loading 151  
hardware 145  
online  
diagnostics 151  
stamdalone  
O
online diagnostics  
concurrent mode 86  
loading 141  
diagnostics 151  
maintenance mode 87  
modes of operation 85  
running 84  
using online diagnostics 145  
using standalone diagnostics 145  
processor  
service mode 85  
online publications xiii  
open firmware  
configure 55  
deconfigure 55  
processor configuration/deconfiguration menu 33  
processor features  
entering 14  
operating considerations  
online and standalone diagnostics 83  
operational phases  
service processor 63  
operator panel display  
reading 11  
processor on demand  
processor on demand  
5
activating process  
activation features  
capacity planning  
8
5
6
dynamic processor sparing  
overview  
processor features  
service agent  
software licenses  
processor sparing, dynamic  
7
overview  
1
5
5
P
7
parameters  
7
service processor  
service mode 50  
partitions  
7
processor subsystem  
product disposal 155  
publications  
2
considerations  
standalone 88  
online xiii  
related xiii  
profiles  
3
passwords 22  
general  
R
change 23  
privileged  
change 23  
POST 11  
indicators 13  
keys  
numeric 1 13  
reboot/restart policy setup menu 29  
recovery  
procedures 168  
strategy 170  
recycling 155  
related publications xiii  
repair log service aid 127  
reset fault indicators 118  
restart recovery 52  
RETAIN 50  
numeric 5 13  
numeric 6 14  
numeric 8 14  
power control network utilities menu 37  
power-off  
service processor  
using the HMC 10  
power-on  
retries 49  
ring indicate power-on menu 28  
run exercisers 129  
S
methods 9, 50  
safety  
self test 11  
service processor  
using the HMC 10  
electrical ix  
safety notices ix  
laser compliance statement  
x
Index 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sample files  
modem  
service aid (continued)  
process supplemental media 128  
ring indicate power on policy 104  
run diagnostics 129  
run error log analysis 129  
run exercisers 129  
configurations 163  
saving service processor settings 159  
scan dump policy 105  
SCSI  
bus analyzer 133  
serial port  
selection menu 46  
snoop setup menu 25  
speed setup menu 47  
service agent  
SCSD tape drive 134  
SCSI bus analyzer 133  
spare sector availability 135  
SSA service aid 135  
update system or service processor flash 136  
service processor 15  
access  
processor on demand  
service aid 95  
7
local 16  
7135 RAIDiant array 137  
remote 16  
7318 service aid 139  
add resource 95  
analyze adapter internal log 95  
backup/restore media 96  
backup settings 159  
boot mode menu 31  
call-in  
test 159  
certify media 97  
call-in/call-out setup menu 44  
call-out  
change hardware VPD 100  
configure dials and LPF Keys 100  
configure ISA adapter 100  
configure reboot policy 101  
configure remote maintenance policy 102  
configure surveillance policy 106  
create customized configuration diskette 106  
delete resource 107  
test 159  
call-out call-home 58  
call-out policy setup menu 49  
checklist 159  
console mirroring 59  
customer account setup menu 50  
error logs 60  
disk to disk copy 107  
disk-based diagnostic 135  
general user menu 17  
language selection menu 42  
main menu 19  
memory configuration/deconfiguration menu 35, 36  
menus 15  
modem configuration menu 45  
monitoring - surveillance 56  
operational phases 63  
OS surveillance setup menu 24  
parameters  
display configuration and resource list 108  
display firmware device node information 108  
display hardware error report 108  
display hardware VPD 109  
display microcode level 115  
display or change diagnostic run-time options 110  
display previous diagnostic results 112  
display resource attributes 112  
display service hints 112  
service mode 50  
display software product data 113  
display system environmental sensors 113  
display test patterns 115  
passwords 22  
power control network utilities menu 37  
power off  
power on  
9
9
display USB Devices 115  
display/alter bootlist 109  
privileged user menus 19  
display/alter sector 108  
download microcode 115  
procedures in service mode 50  
processor configuration/deconfiguration menu 33  
reboot/restart policy setup menu 29  
reboot/restart recovery 52  
ring indicate power-on menu 28  
serial port  
fibre channel RAID service aids 119  
flash SK-NET FDDI firmware 119  
format media 120  
generic microcode download 122  
local area network 127  
configuration 161  
log repair action 127  
serial port selection menu 46  
serial port snoop setup menu 25  
serial port speed setup menu 47  
machine check error log 109  
PCI RAID physical disk identify 128  
periodic diagnostics 128  
192 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
service processor (continued)  
settings  
T
telephone setup menu 47  
terminal emulators 167  
terminal type  
saving and restoring 16  
setup 159  
setup checklist 159  
setup menu 21  
system information menu 32  
system power control menu 27  
telephone setup menu 47  
test 159  
identifying 84  
testing the setup  
call-in 160  
call-out 161  
trademarks xiv  
transfer of a modem session 169  
set identify indicators 126  
setup and test  
service processor 159  
setup menu 21  
V
verifying hardware operation 141  
slow boot 88  
specifc files  
modem  
configuration 163  
SSA service aid 135  
standalone diagnostics 88  
loading 142  
NIM server 89, 91  
partition considerations 88  
surveillance  
monitoring 56  
system  
configuration  
power-on  
methods  
2
9
profiles  
4
system attention indicators 126  
system information menu 32  
system introduction  
1
system management services 67  
boot devices, select 79  
boot options, select 76  
error log, view 69  
exiting SMS 82  
IPL, remote setup 71  
IPL, setup 71  
multiboot startup 82  
password, change options 69  
password, privileged-access 69  
SCSI settings, change 75  
select console 76  
select language 68  
settings, display current 81  
settings, restore default 81  
system power-on methods 50  
system verification  
performing additional 143  
running 142  
Index 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
194 Eserver pSeries 690 User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
pSeries 690  
User’s Guide  
Publication No. SA38-0588-02  
Overall, how satisfied are you with the information in this book?  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Dissatisfied  
Very  
Dissatisfied  
h
Overall satisfaction  
h
h
h
h
How satisfied are you that the information in this book is:  
Very Satisfied  
Satisfied  
Neutral  
Dissatisfied  
Very  
Dissatisfied  
Accurate  
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Complete  
Easy to find  
Easy to understand  
Well organized  
Applicable to your tasks  
Please tell us how we can improve this book:  
Thank you for your responses. May we contact you?  
h Yes  
h No  
When you send comments to IBM, you grant IBM a nonexclusive right to use or distribute your comments in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Name  
Address  
Company or Organization  
Phone No.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
Readers’ Comments — We’d Like to Hear from You  
SA38-0588-02  
IBMR  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
NO POSTAGE  
NECESSARY  
IF MAILED IN THE  
UNITED STATES  
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL  
FIRST-CLASS MAIL PERMIT NO. 40 ARMONK, NEW YORK  
POSTAGE WILL BE PAID BY ADDRESSEE  
Information Development  
Department H6DS-905-6C006  
11501 Burnet Road  
Austin, TX 78758-3493  
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _  
Fold and Tape  
Please do not staple  
Fold and Tape  
Cut or Fold  
Along Line  
SA38-0588-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBMR  
Printed in U.S.A.  
October 2002  
SA38-0588-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grandstream Networks Security Camera GXV 3611HD User Manual
Grizzly Chipper G0595 User Manual
Grizzly DVR G9947 User Manual
Hamilton Beach Mixer 840106200 User Manual
HannsG Computer Monitor JW199D User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Air Compressor 40134 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Saw 01624 User Manual
Hotpoint Dishwasher HDA3520ZBB User Manual
Hunter Fan Fan Type 5 Models User Manual
IBM Computer Monitor 31P6240 User Manual